Home

Q-Flex™ Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook

1. Table 6 61 Ethernet Speed Duplex 6 57 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 17 Ethernet MTU Range 2 000 bytes to 10 000 bytes step size 1 byte Description This controls the Ethernet Maximum Transmission Unit MTU size which defines the largest Ethernet frame that can be handled by the modem in bridging mode without fragmentation into smaller frames Table 6 62 Ethernet MTU 6 2 3 Edit gt IP gt Advanced Screen The Edit gt IP Advanced screen shown in Figure 6 23 allows the following to be set up e P buffers used in the process of receiving terrestrial IP packets and transmitting them over satellite The buffers influence the quality of service with respect to overall packet delay and whether packets are dropped or buffered during periods of congestion e Miscellaneous settings used in specific modes of operation including operation of the 4 port Ethernet switch internal VLAN tagging inside the modem and point to multipoint operation e MPEG2 transport stream processing when using the ASI interface or IP over DVB where several MPEG2 transport stream packets are included inside one IP packet e Multiple streams when using DVB S2 Variable Coding and Modulation VCM Two streams are supported two ASI streams or one ASI stream plus IP 6 58 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Redundancy Tx Predistorter d IP Paired Carrier
2. Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 2 BUC LO Frequency Range 99 999GHZ to 99 999GHz step size 0 0000001GHz Description This is the local oscillator frequency of the BUC Table 6 29 BUC LO Frequency 6 2 4 3 BUC Attenuation Range OdB to 15 0dB step size 1dB Description This varies the front end attenuation applied by the the BUC This is used when there is a low level of signal loss between the modem and BUC in order to prevent the modem output from saturating the BUC Table 6 30 BUC Attenuation 6 2 4 4 DC to BUC This is an On Off control used to enable and disable the DC power supply from the modem to the BUC 6 2 4 5 10MHz to BUC This is an On Off control used to enable and disable the 10MHz reference from the modem to the BUC 6 2 4 6 Mute BUC Services in Standby This is an On Off control used to enable and disable the transfer of BUC DC and 10MHz services from a failed modem to a backup modem in a 1 1 or 1 N redundancy system Setting the checkbox causes the services to switch over from the online modem to the backup modem on a failure Note that FSK communications will always be switched over 6 26 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 7 LNB Type None This indicates that no LNB is fitted Other This indicates that an LNB is fitted but is not one of the Paradise LNBs listed below C 3 63
3. IPv4 and This enables the entry and display of IP addresses in either IPv4 format or IPv6 IPv6 format The modem will bridge and route both IPv4 and IPv6 packets in this mode Table 6 60 IPv4 IPv6 Mode 6 2 2 16 M amp C and IP Traffic Ethernet Speed Duplex Table 6 61 lists the different Ethernet speed and duplex settings for the modem s Ethernet interfaces The M amp C interface and IP traffic interface can be set independently of each other Changes will be effective immediately but when an auto negotiated mode is selected then any Ethernet connection will be briefly disconnected while the change takes effect The Auto setting is recommended for normal use but because Ethernet auto negotiation varies between different manufacturers it may be necessary to fix the speed and duplex in some circumstances The type of cable crossover or straight is always automatically sensed by the modem which will work with both 6 56 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Auto In this mode the modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings 10M half duplex In this mode the modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings but as part of the negotiation will advertise 10Mbps half duplex as the only option available 10M full duplex The modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings but as part of the negotiation will
4. e Strict priority queuing packets are queued for transmission based solely on their priority with the highest always being sent first Strict priority queuing is active whenever Weighted QoS is set to Off e Fair weighting queuing higher priority packets are transmitted first but lower priority packets are given a percentage of the bandwidth Fair weighting queuing is active whenever Weighted QoS is set to On The implementation of IEEE 802 1p packet prioritization is as follows e The eight QoS priority levels are mapped to three TCP IP queues in the modem e Packets with highest QoS priority level 7 are sent to high priority TCP IP queue e Delay sensitive packets QoS levels 6 and 5 are sent to the medium priority queue e The remainder QoS levels 4 to 0 are sent to the low priority TCP IP queue e For strict priority queuing all packets in the high priority queue are processed before any in the medium priority queue which in turn are processed before any in the low priority queue 6 55 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook For fair weighting queuing for every four packets sent from the high priority queue two are sent from medium priority queue and one from the low priority queue 6 2 2 15 IPv4 IPv6 Mode IPv4 only This enables the entry and display of IP addresses in IPv4 format only The modem will bridge IPv4 and IPv6 packets when in IPv4 mode but will route only IPv4 packets
5. 7 3 1 1 Redundancy Operation 7 3 1 Overview Two modems can operate as a 1 1 redundant pair using a single interconnecting lead two power splitters combiners and cable forms to parallel up the terrestrial interfaces of both units Both modems operate normally with respect to incoming data and IF signals but only one modem enables its satellite and terrestrial outputs at any point in time Figure 7 8 illustrates how a 1 1 redundant pair is configured TO DN MODEM UPCHAIN 8 3333 re Is WEE o 9999 2 FROM DOWNCHAIN 1 1 Modem Redundancy Connection Schematic TX IF L BAND MODEM A COMBINER Data Kach TO P3480 UPCHAIN Cable 1 1 CONTROL CABLE FROM Se DOWNCHAIN a ery J vie 398 MODEM B RX IF L BAND SPLITTER Equivalent 1 1 pair Figure 7 8 Modem 1 1 Redundancy System It is possible to replace the offline modem in a 1 1 pair without interrupting traffic 7 3 2 Switching Operation If a particular modem is required to be the online modem then this should be powered up first Alternatively a manual switchover should be invoked once the modems have powered up This is achieved by selecting the Switch to standby control on the Edit gt Redundancy gt 1 1 menu which momentarily simulates a failure in the operational unit The Standby modem monitors its own status and the status of the online modem continually and will switch over to become the online modem automatically in the event that a
6. Figure 13 3 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IBS Screen This contains the following options e High rate ESC data mode Controls whether the IBS high rate asynchronous ESC channel is enabled e High rate ESC overhead usage This allows backward compatibility with the Paradise P230 unit but should otherwise be set to Maximum overhead e ESC interface baud rate IBS uses a fixed frame format and therefore the amount of overhead is limited The maximum ESC baud rate that may be selected is displayed e ESC interface character length This can be set to 7 or 8 bits e ESC interface parity polarity This can be set to None Even or Odd 13 4 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e IBS Aux mode This controls the operating mode of the Aux channel controlling the allocation of overhead between the Aux and ESC interfaces The Aux channel can be setto Off Intelsat over sampled or Synchronous e Enable backward alarm This controls whether a backward alarm facility is supported as part of the ESC channel e ESC interface type This specifies which of the modem s physical interfaces is to be connected through to the satellite ESC channel This is described under the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead Closed screen description e Aux interface type This specifies the Aux electrical interface The relevant physical interface on the shared Async ESC Aux port on the base modem or the separate Aux port on the IDR
7. Local In Local mode only the front panel can be used to control the modem Local remote In Local remote mode the modem accepts commands from any user interface at any time Table 6 33 Modem Control Passwords for the administrator login name admin and user login name user can be changed the default password for both is paradise Administrators can both view and control the modem whereas other users can only view modem web pages Multiple users can be logged on at the same time When the administrator password is changed then the modem s web user interface will issue an immediate new login request which needs to be completed using the new password 6 2 6 2 RADIUS Server IP Address and Fallback Address The modem supports a RADIUS client that communicates with the server in order to authenticate each user and to provide the authorised level of access administrator or view only This allows users to log in using their personal organization login credentials All login and configuration change activities are recorded in the modem s log giving greater visibility and accountability Server This sets the IP address for a network server that supports the RADIUS IP address AAA server to be used for authenticating users login credentials Fallback This sets the IP address for a fallback RADIUS network server to be used server IP in the event that the primary server cannot be contacted The timeout address per
8. Maid NO TEE 6 96 A A Se ee ae 6 97 6 43 Edit Men E 6 98 6 431 Gi TX MGUY Eeer et 6 99 GE E EE 6 100 6 4 3 3 Edit gt Unit Men NENNEN 6 101 6 4 4 Vew MENU ree das 6 102 6 4 5 Test MIER eet uge ee gege ege See 6 102 Chapter 7 Modem Concepts iicccintccicioniioc ninaicca ini 7 1 7 1 System E le WEE 7 1 Laly ie uge Te EE 7 2 TASA ternal CIO 7 2 Badia DOGO Miracle 7 2 n EC E A O 7 3 74 2 Receive CIOCKING iii ii 7 4 A LEE ee ee 7 4 NL DEI GE 7 4 FOE WEE Bee E 7 5 TAZA a CHOC sacra af e a ete ead ec eet aa EEN 7 6 7 1 3 Guidelines for Clocking Configuration ccoconincconcccccnnnccnnnnananccnnnncnnnnnnannncnnos 7 6 7 1 3 1 Glock Loop at One Edicion eee 7 6 PA No CIO ee 7 7 7 1 3 3 Determining Er 7 7 71 34 G 703 Clock Extension ssciceccdeengeeeeceeessedteneesvevesesedecsersrexteu Eege e 7 8 7 2 Automatic Uplink e EE alt EE 7 8 Zack INTO UICN a A A ee ee 7 8 7 2 2 GC rfig uring AUREA a o is 7 9 7 3 1 1 Redundancy Operation 7 10 L E Ma 7 10 32 SWitehing Operation a a ta id 7 10 1397 CUP PROC COG sc seca as 7 11 7 3 4 IP Addressing and Operation in Redundancy Contouratons 7 11 7 3 4 1 1 1 e AAA nee 7 11 7 3 4 2 1 N IP Operation EE 7 12 ZA Software Activated Features 7 12 7 5 S ftware UPgracind cts iS 7 13 7 6 LinkGuard Interference Detection and Carrier Relocation ooooooooocccccnnnccccccno 7 14 7 7 FastLink Low latency LDP Cuca 7 15 7 8 IPS FPUMGHONAIILY 2222 qt A A can EEE 7 19 7 8 1 A a E AE
9. is switched off via the Paired Carrier enable setting on the Edit gt Paired Carrier menu 2 Before starting it is strongly recommended to prepare for a BER data transparency test using data test sets connected to each modem or using the modem internal PRBS BER test feature which can be temporarily enabled if necessary 3 Configure both modems for identical services including the same Tx and Rx frequencies Different PRBS test patterns must be used in each direction e g for Modem 1 Tx to Modem 2 Rx use 2415 1 and for Modem 2 Tx to Modem 1 Rx use 2423 1 This ensures that the two signals are sufficiently different from each other to allow Paired Carrier to work 4 Check the Tx power level setting is correct and bring up the first carrier using the selected common transmission frequency and e Check the receive signal level Eb No spectrum and constellation are as expected e Check the received signal is data transparent 5 Switch the first carrier off 6 Check the Tx power level setting is correct and bring up the second carrier using the selected common transmission frequency and 6 69 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 e Check the receive signal level Eb No spectrum and constellation are as expected e Check the received signal is data transparent Switch the second carrier off To avoid non linear distortion ensure adequate HPA back off when using multiple carriers through a s
10. uf ITESO e f o ECC 2 oeoa aroo sl Toe mathk sm rass aerer sl ul J emstke o U indicates lines are optional In Closed Net plus ESC mode the aux port is not used In IBS modes the Aux port can be set to both Intelsat using TS32 bit 1 and Sync modes selectable to use any of TS16 TS32 bits 18 5 8 4 TS48 In both modes a clock is provided and the port can be used synchronously with the clock or asynchronously allowing the async data to be oversampled by the higher rate clock In this oversampled mode as specified by Intelsat the Baud rate is limited to approximately 25 33 of the synchronous clock rate In IDR modes the Aux port provides either 32 or 64kbps data access in place of either one or both of the 32kbps ADPCM audio channels Typically this would be used synchronously but if required it could be used asynchronously and oversampled giving maximum baud rates of approx 9600 Baud in place of one audio channel or 19200 Baud in place of both Audio channels 10 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Audio Ports MA A 34 35 J All ports are 6000 with levels 7dBm to 16dBm set independently from the front panel Audio is encoded as 32kbps ADPCM or 16kbps ADPCM in some custom modes ae Rx Audio Channel 1 out B The Audio ports may be used in two applications In IBS modes if set to emulate a P1348 P1448 Audio Data mux card the ESC ports provide t
11. of the TCPs port usage in relation to these commands Table 6 37 Modem Control P REMOTE Roses MEE EN PORT INTERMAL LIME FR OM IP ESC PORT FROM Mer PC M amp C TO DISTANT END EQUIPMENTS KE PFORWARD TO REMOTE T IP REMOTE INTERNAL LINK TOP Rasta MEE ESC KN PORT ETHER NET h INTERNAL UNE PORI FROM IP ESC FROM MELC PC M amp C TO DISTANT TO LOCAL M amp C P ADDR END EQUIPMENTS TCP 6703 ue O Tas P REMOTE MAIN eg 2 PORT ETHERMET INTERMAL LINK PORT FR OM IP TRAFFIC ER OM M amp C PC M amp C TO DISTANT TO REMOTE M amp C P ADDR END EQUIPMENTS TCP 6703 Figure 6 10 Serial M amp C Interface IP ESC Extension Modes 6 32 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Table 6 33 defines the serial M amp C RS485 interface pinout when P Remote is selected refer to Chapter 11 for full connector pinouts Signal RS485 IP Remote Mode Name Shield Gnd Shield Gnd Table 6 38 Serial M amp C Interface RS485 Pinout IP Remote Mode from modem ME ME Range 1 to 255 step size 1 Description This is the RS485 address that is assigned to the modem s serial M amp C interface Table 6 39 Serial M amp C Interface RS485 Address Range 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115200 Description This sets the baud rate associated with the modem s serial M amp C interface Table 6 40 Serial M amp C Interface Baud
12. 3 View 4 Test The Main menu can be accessed from any display by pressing the MAIN key It is from this menu that all functions are selected It contains the following sub menus Status Displays modem operational status summary information Edit Allows modification of all modem configurable properties View Displays detailed operational status and read only configurable property values Test Controls the selection of test modes A user set Modem Identifier is shown on the top line of the screen and is typically used to specify the physical location of the modem or identify the modem satellite link This can be set via the Edit gt Unit gt M8 C gt ldentity menu 6 96 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 2 Status Menu STATUS Setup Traffic Demodulator PCMA ACM BUC AUPC 1 for N hise SETUP Tx carrier frequency Rx carrier frequency Tx data rate Rx data rate Tx symbol rate Rx symbol rate TRAFFIC Tx path okay since OR last Tx fault message Rx path okay since OR last Rx fault message Tx carrier status DEMODULATOR Eb No Es No Rx power level Rx frequency offset Doppler buffer usage Overflows Underflows PCMA Paired Carrier lock status Paired Carrier frequency offset Paired Carrier satellite delay ACM Remote Es No ACM Tx modcod ACM Tx data rate ACM Tx on off status ACM Rx modcod ACM Rx data rate ACM Rx on off status BUC Output on off status
13. Connector pinouts are defined in Chapter 11 Figure 5 4 Modem Rear Panel From left to right the rear panel consists of e IEC Mains Power Connector Voltage Selector Fuse The modem is designed to operate from a mains AC supply of 100 to 240V 90 to 250VAC 1A 100V 0 5A 240V 47 to 63Hz The IEC connector incorporates two fuses independently fusing both live and neutral lines Access to the fuses is provided by a slide out tray Both fuses are standard 20mm type rated T3 15A of the slow blow time delay type e Chassis Ground Stud 5 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook There is an M4 stud for connecting a safety earth conductor directly to the chassis of the unit Tx IF Output This is a 500 750 BNC female connector The output power level can be varied from OdBm to 25dBm Tx L band Output This is a 500 N type female connector The output power level can be varied from OdBm to 30dBm Alarms and AGC Connector This is a 15 pin D type male connector that provides access to four form C relay contacts that indicate alarm conditions An AGC output is provided that is suitable for peaking antenna position The alarm relays have the following definitions Unit Fault A fault exists on the unit indicating an equipment failure Traffic Prompt A Tx traffic fault exists Rx Traffic Prompt An Rx traffic fault exists Deferred Alarm One of the following conditions exists e The rece
14. Ste PortEnd o 500000 900000 ne 10 1 70 5 255 255 255 255 21 D Submit 1 400000 800000 Uy 110 1 70 2 255 255 255 255 22 D Submit 2 50000 11000000 2 10 3 80 0 255 255 255 255 23 0 Submit 3 50000 11000000 Se 110 3 0 0 255 255 255 255 24 D Submit 4 P 0 oy 0 00 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 Submit s P i i oy 0 00 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 Submit 6 H i ov D000 255 255 255 255 0 D Submit 7 P P ov D000 255 256 256 265 0 D Submit Dest Address Dest Mask DestPort Dest Port End o 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 D Submit 1 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 DD Submit 2 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 OF oO Submit 3 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 p Submit 4 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 pn Submit 5 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 p Submit 6 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 P Submit 7 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 E Submit Def D Submit Total 1000000 Figure 7 11 Traffic Shaping Configuration Screen using IP Addresses As can be seen QoS Class O is guaranteed a bandwidth of 500 000bps It may be allocated up to 900 000bps depending on what is allocated to other QoS classes If no other data is being received then Class 0 will be allocated up to 900 000bps if needed Assume at this point when Class 0 ideally wants 900 000bps that the Class 1 data stream is flowing at 350 000bps Since 350 000bps is less than the CIR of Class 1 then it will get all the bandwidth it needs Class 0 will get its guaranteed 500 000 bps but will be allocated only an additional 150 000bps bringing its t
15. Table 6 58 Encapsulation PID 6 54 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 13 MPE MAC Address Format 00 11 29 00 F0 23 example Description For DVB S2 IP services this is used for filtering of Multi Protocol Encapsulation MPE packets on the receive side The receiver will filter against whatever MAC address has been provided which can therefore be a virtual MAC address rather than the receivers address There is currently no equivalent modulator support to allow a specific MAC address to be added to MPE packets A Paradise modulator will always set the MPE MAC address to all zeros in routing mode and to the destination MAC address of the incoming Ethernet frame when in bridging mode Table 6 59 MPE MAC Address 6 2 2 14 Weighted QoS This is an On Off control that controls IEEE 802 1p packet prioritization It is mutually exclusive with the traffic shaping feature and when traffic shaping is enabled then strict fair queuing will be automatically switched off This allows for eight classes of data to be specified as part of a three bit field within the Layer 2 IEEE 802 1q VLAN header The packets must already be tagged at the point of entry to the modem Priority 7 is typically used for network critical traffic such as dynamic routing protocol packets priorities 5 and 6 for video and voice etc The modem uses the priority tag to decide how to process each packet The options are
16. The modem can be operated as a two port static router one port being the terrestrial interface and the other port being the satellite interface Static routing is useful for small networks that do not require dynamic routing it can be activated by selecting routing mode but not enabling any dynamic routing protocols static routing is provided as a free feature Each route comprises a Destination IP Address Subnet Mask and a Gateway Address H the destination address of a packet fails to match any entries in the routing table and the packet has a destination address outside of the local network the packet will be sent to the default gateway if specified otherwise the packet will be discarded Static routes can also be entered and the whole routing table displayed via the telnet interface to Zebra within the Quagga Router when in Routing Mode The Zebra interface is not dissimilar to Cisco s command line interface and is described in the Quagga user manual available from http www quagga net docs quagga paf Dynamic routing in the modem offers support for RIP V1 and V2 OSPF V2 and V3 and BGP V4 Note that the 64 static routes have precedence over dynamic routes When dynamic routing is on traffic will be automatically routed across satellite correctly by automatic exchange of routing information with other routers The routing information exchange uses satellite bandwidth and is therefore an overhead The amount of bandwidth requi
17. Trunking mode Trunking mode implements a Layer 2 bridge in hardware This results in a much higher packet handling capability up to 500 000 packets per second as opposed to a maximum of 150 000 packets per second when in other modes Because the processor is bypassed in this mode jitter is also minimised and typically registers as zero when measured with Ethernet test equipment ACM and AUPC can be used in Trunking mode but other IP features such as TCP acceleration cannot be used because they require the packets to be passed through the processor Table 6 50 IP Mode 6 47 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Modem Settings Ethernet Operation Bridging Routing M amp C and IP TCP Operation of Operation of Mode Traffic Acceleration M amp C IP Traffic Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ports Port Port Bridging Bridged Off M amp C address IP Traffic address shared with IP not used port is Traffic port M amp C addressed via traffic will be M amp C address bridged over traffic will be satellite as required bridged over satellite as requried Bridging Bridged On This combination of modem settings is illegal M amp C port will be automatically removed from bridge Bridging Not bridged Off M amp C port has IP Traffic port has dedicated address dedicated address M amp C traffic will not traffic will be be bridged over bridged over satellite sate
18. gt Overhead IDR Green 13 5 13 5 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced Drop and Insert Screens oooccccccccnncccococcncccconananananonons 13 7 Chapter 14 GlOSSary coa tapices dia 14 1 Ghapter 15 Technical Support enge eb e eegene gEEEgE EE 15 1 viii Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 1 Welcome TELEDYNE FARADISE DATACOM a a DOG LMS sone Figure 1 1 Q Flex Advanced Satellite Modem The Q Flex Figure 1 1 satellite modem embodies a new concept in satellite modem technology a flexible software defined modem that does what you want now and in the future The Q Flex modem provides a flexible hardware platform with support for IF 70 140MHz and L band operation in one unit Its powerful processor is ideal for handling IP traffic However the Q Flex modem can be fitted with virtually any type of terrestrial interface and will operate at data rates up to 160Mbps Low cost of ownership is supported by a pay as you go feature set where individual features can be enabled when required The Q Flex modem incorporates a new software suite called XStream IP This has been created in response to a perceived widespread dissatisfaction in the industry with the usability and quality of service provided by IP over satellite in general Paradise has re engineered every aspect of IP support from the ground up to ensure ease of use a high degree of integration between features and outstanding perform
19. namely access to satellite bandwidth and the level of delay and jitter that is experienced The Paradise traffic shaping feature is controlled via the modem web user interface under Edit gt Unit gt Advanced gt QoS 7 8 9 1 Guaranteed Bandwidth The allocation of bandwidth to a classified data stream can be controlled via the Edit gt Unit gt Advanced gt QoS tab of the web user interface The Commited Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth in bits per second bps that will be allocated to the specified data stream This is the level of bandwidth that is guaranteed under all normal circumstances where the equipment is operating correctly The sum of all CIRs for all classified data streams cannot be more that the transmission data rate of the modem 7 8 9 2 Maximum Bandwidth If excess bandwidth becomes available at any point i e one or more streams do not require their allocated bandwidth or some of the overall bandwidth has not been allocated to any particular stream then it is not wasted and it can be allocated in a controlled manner between potentially competing streams This setting is called the Burst Information Rate BIR specified in bits per second bps It defines the maximum amount of bandwidth beyond the guaranteed bandwidth that a stream should be allocated should spare bandwidth become available Each BIR should not be greater than the transmission data rate of the modem 7 23 Q Flex Satellite
20. station reference fails Selectable in 1ms increments from Oms to 99ms at data rates up to 42Mbps and from Oms to 80ms at data rates from 42Mbps up to 55Mbps Automatically adjusted to slip an integer number of terrestrial multi frame lengths for framed rates Buffer storage Maximum buffer size 256kbytes Buffer Size 12 5 Framing and Deframing Specifications Parameter Modem Closed Network Format Unframed no overhead Intelsat IBS to IESS 309 and IESS 310 up to 10 Mbps IBS SMS Option Format and Eutelsat SMS to EESS501 Intelsat IDR to IESS 308 and IESS 310 up to 10 Mbps Provides variable rate asynchronous ESC optional synchronous scrambler above 32kbps to replace error Closed Network plus multiplying V 35 scrambler optional backward alarm ESC Format facility and optional timeslot ID maintenance when used with Drop Insert all in minimum possible overhead down to lt 0 5 IDR Option Format 12 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 6 Intelsat Reed Solomon Codec and Custom Option Specifications Parameter Modem Concatenated Reed Solomon outer codec to IESS 308 310 Default n k t 126 112 7 depth 4 Automatically switches to 225 205 10 depth 4 for 1544kbps IDR mode or 219 201 9 depth 4 for 2048kbps IDR mode and TCM lt 1544kbps or 219 201 9 depth 8 for TCM gt 1544kbps Combined encoder and decoder 8 x 2n k 60 Combined Interleaver De
21. 12 Quality of service scheme Diffserv DSCP y Enable shaping M Quality of service IP address class Source address port Input Mode E cir bps BIR bps Priority o 200000 feoo000D ox 1 200000 0000 ix 2 fiooooo fio00000 2z 3 fiooo0oo fioo0000 3x a Fooss Fame Ps s base f ooooso Es 6 fioo000 fio0000 Ted Fooss fioou000 Ps Det P E Total 1000000 Tx data 1000000 1000000 Figure 7 12 Traffic Shaping Configuration Screen using DSCP 7 8 9 4 3 IEEE 802 1p Priority Tag Classification may be done on the 3 bit Priority Code Point field of an IEEE 802 1q VLAN tag also referred to as an IEEE 802 1p Priority Tag This is part of a 32 bit field inserted into an Ethernet frame between the MAC address and length field The priority tag has eight possible values each of which maps directly to an equivalent internal class within the modem for which a BIR CIR etc can be set Each packet passed to the modem must have this field set to the appropriate value in order for the modem to recognize the different data streams Note that the modem includes support for IEEE 802 1p priority tagging as an alternative QoS scheme to traffic shaping in its own right In this case the packets must already be tagged at the point of entry to the modem It is a layer 2 feature that uses 8 classes of data 7 27 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 3 bit field to prioritise packets The modem uses t
22. 2 5 5 Acknowledge Power Break ENEE 6 21 6 2 5 6 Reed Solomon EE sita dd 6 22 6 2 1 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced Timeslot Screens oooccccnncccnoccnnncncnnanananiccnanccanacnns 6 22 6 2 2 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing Screen EE 6 22 6 2 3 Edit gt Tx Rx gt AUPC Gcreen 6 22 6 2 3 1 AUP lege ita EE EE 6 23 6232 Target Remote Eb NO visas bread 6 23 6 2 3 3 Maximum AUPC Power Offset 6 23 6 2 3 4 Maximum Negative AUPC Power Offset 6 24 623 5 AUPG Method ii a Ee ee tet ees 6 24 6 2 36 Carrier Loss ACM dla 6 24 6 2 3 7 Local Demod Unlocked Action c oooccccncnccnncnnnnccnnnaninnnicinnnccn nana no nanannnos 6 24 6 2 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt BUC LNB Gcreen 6 25 6241 BUC Niera e icici eek oe ete ih aga Ee A ea hd 6 25 6 2 4 2 BUC LO Frequency EE 6 26 6 2 4 3 BUC Attenuation ccooccccnccccnncncnncncnnncnnnnoncnnncnnnncnnnnnnnn narco nana n aoad iiaa 6 26 6 2 4 4 DE te Ulee ee es tee ee ee 6 26 6 2 4 5 10MHZ top 6 26 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 6 Mute BUC Services in Standby uk 6 26 6 24 77 CNB Type a A ias deis 6 27 6 2 4 8 LNB LO Frequency siii did 6 27 6 24 97 DG o EN a APER EE Ge Seka deve do eae 6 27 6 2 4 10 TOMA K ren EE 6 27 6 2 4 11 Mute LNB Services in Standby ANEN 6 27 6 25 Edit SUnit SOM dadas EE 6 27 6 2 6 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C Gereen 6 28 6 2 6 1 Modem Control and PasswordS ooccccnccccnncccnnncnnnncnnnnacannnancnnacnnnnannnnns 6 29 6 2 6 2 RADIUS Server
23. 4 5 5 6 64APSK L 32 45 Short Frame QPSK 11 45 4 15 14 45 7 15 8 15 32 45 8PSK 7 15 8 15 26 45 32 45 16APSK 7 15 8 15 26 45 3 5 32 45 32APSK 2 3 32 45 Very Short Frame Frame size of 5 400 bits reducing latency to 33 of standard DVB S2 Short frame QPSK 2 5 7 15 8 15 3 5 2 3 11 15 4 5 13 15 14 15 8PSK 2 5 7 15 8 15 3 5 2 3 11 15 4 5 13 15 14 15 16APSK 2 5 7 15 8 15 3 5 2 3 11 15 4 5 13 15 14 15 32APSK 2 5 7 15 8 15 3 5 2 3 11 15 4 5 13 15 14 15 Ultra Short Frame Frame size of 3 240 bits reducing latency to 20 of standard DVB S2 Short frame QPSK 1 3 4 9 5 9 2 3 7 9 8 9 8PSK 1 3 4 9 5 9 2 3 7 9 8 9 16APSK 1 3 4 9 5 9 2 3 7 9 8 9 32APSK 1 3 4 9 5 9 2 3 7 9 8 9 6 16 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook TPC BPSK 5 16 21 44 3 4 7 8 QPSK and OQPSK 5 16 21 44 3 4 7 8 0 93 8PSK 3 4 7 8 0 93 16QAM 3 4 7 8 0 93 Viterbi BPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 QPSK and OQPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 TCM 8PSK 2 3 Sequential BPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 QPSK and OQPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 Table 6 9 Tx Rx Modulation and FEC Code Rates 6 2 4 12 Tx Rx Frequency Band The modem supports independent selection of IF and L band operation in transmit and receive IF This selects the 7OMHz and 140MHz IF bands allowing operation from 50MHz to 90OMHz and 100MHz to 180MHz L band This selects L band all
24. 639 operates at a BER QEF point of 1e 12 only with Eb No guaranteed as follows Low BER mode 5 9dB Balanced mode 6 2dB Low Latency mode 6 7dB Note 2 8PSK rate 0 710 can be used in a Low BER mode at a BER QEF point of 1e 12 only with Eb No of 5 9dB guaranteed Note 3 BER performance for this FEC rate is to be announced Note 4 16QAM rate 0 726 can be used in a Low BER mode at a BER QEF point of 1e 12 only with Eb No of 7 6dB guaranteed Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 IP Functionality 7 8 1 Base Modem IP As shown in Figure 7 10 the modem has one RJ45 auto sensing Gigabit Ethernet port for M amp C and one for sending and receiving satellite IP traffic A 4 port Gigabit Ethernet switch is available as an option ona PARADISE DATACOM STATION CLOCK Figure 7 10 Modem Ethernet Ports Both of the Ethernet connections by default form part of an Ethernet bridge and share an IP address Essentially the bridge makes the modem disappear from the network in relation to passing IP traffic over a satellite Consequently for simple point to point communications little or no user set up is required to pass IP traffic over satellite If both Ethernet ports are configured to be part of the bridge then a single Ethernet connection to the modem can be used for both IP traffic and modem M amp C control using either of the two RJ45 connectors If the M amp C port is configured to be outside the
25. C Specification for Q Flex Satellite Modem These must be sent to a specific TCP port that the modem listens on for PUP commands Typically this will result in much faster communications than when using Telnet This method is referred to as direct encapsulation elsewhere in this document to differentiate it from the Telnet type of communications Thirdly SNMP V1 or V2c can be used to communicate between an SNMP network manager and the SNMP agent on the modem The remote control protocol for the modem is specified in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Flex Satellite Modem M amp C message example The following example shows how to 1 get the transmit power from a modem The response has a value of 25 Note that numeric text denotes the message contents as hexadecimal characters get TIFTx FPwrer 02 15 01 09 67 65 74 20 54 49 46 54 78 49 46 50 77 72 2A OB 03 2 5 02 0A 01 09 2D 32 35 2A C8 03 8 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 2 Login to the modem to be able to make changes The response has a value of login paradis ef 02 15 01 09 6C 6F 67 69 6E 20 70 61 72 61 64 69 73 65 2A B6 03 02 08 01 09 20 2A 54 03 3 Setthe transmit power to a new value 20 The response has a value of set TIlFTx FPwrer 20 02 19 01 09 73 65 74 20 54 49 46 54 78 49 46 50 77 72 20 2D 32 30 2A C6 03 02 08 01 09 20 2A 54 03 4 getthe transmit power t
26. Carrier is attempting to acquire the carrier refer to Section 6 2 3 for potential causes Paired Carrier frequency offset This is the measured offset between the expected centre frequency for the wanted carrier and the actual centre frequency An unexpectedly large offset may indicate a false lock where Paired Carrier is locked to something other than the wanted carrier Paired Carrier satellite delay This is the measured round trip delay to the satellite Once this value has been established then the carrier acquisition time can be optimised by setting the Paired Carrier minimum and maximum satellite delays accordingly It is recommended that these are set to the measured delay 0 5ms respectively via the Edit gt Paired Carrier menu Paired Carrier near far power ratio This indicates the power spectral density ratio of the two overlapped carriers It may be useful during deployment and whenever degraded performance is being experienced to check that the power ratio is as expected in relation to the level of power asymmetry The power ratio should be in the range 10dB to 10dB for normal operation 6 2 2 4 Status ACM The Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM section of the Status screen is displayed and continually updated with the following while ACM is active Remote modem Es No energy per symbol to spectral noise density ratio Transmit data rate This is the instantaneous transmit data rate which varies with m
27. Drop insert bearer format This specifies the framing format for Drop Insert MUX operation The supported formats are G 732 T1 D4 and T1 ESF Generate bearer This specifies whether the modem should generate a bearer for G 703 traffic or whether a bearer is already being looped through the modem and the modem should multiplex its data onto this 13 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 13 2 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead Closed Screen The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead Closed screen shown in Figure 13 2 controls the overhead in Closed Network Plus ESC mode allowing the high rate asynchronous ESC channel to be set up Tx Rx Paired Carrier Redundancy SECH Framing BUC LNB Overhead Closed Betons eee Tx ESC interface baud rate Rx ESC interface baud rate Tx ESC interface character Rx ESC interface character length length Tx ESC interface parity Rx ESC interface parity polarity polarity ESC Interface Tx enable backward alarm Rx enable backward alarm ESC interface type Figure 13 2 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead Closed Screen This contains the following options ESC interface baud rate This can be set in the range 110 baud to 115 200 baud ESC interface character length This can be set to 7 or 8 bits ESC interface parity polarity This can be set to None Even or Odd Enable backward alarm This controls whether a backward alarm facility is supported as part
28. EE 7 19 7 8 2 IP AddressiNg EE 7 20 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e NN E sites a cate Sans bay a a os wenn erase 7 20 7 8 3 Throughput Performance tao da o adas tae is antes 7 20 7 8 4 Jumbo Ethernet Frame Support 7 20 Teo IR Ee BSG eege EE EE 7 20 7 83 60 IP interoperability eer e ee EE 7 22 7 8 7 IP Connectivity Modes deeeuegeere deeg recoletos 7 22 7 8 8 Keen EE 7 22 7 8 9 Traffic Shaping eri eee ee ee ie 7 23 7 8 9 1 Guaranteed Bandwidth asii ria 7 23 7 8 9 2 Maximum Ee a A 7 23 A A 7 24 7 8 9 4 Stream Classitica O ee iii 7 24 08 95 Traffic Shaping Graphics iii 7 29 7 8 10 Static and Dynamic Routing viii 7 30 7 8 11 Header Compression un 7 31 7 8 12 Eer Ee EE 7 31 7 8 13 Adaptive Coding and Modulation LACH 7 32 7 9 DWYB S2 and Man scott 7 34 710 Rated Came tt he as tg haa ea ee ce ee a ee 7 37 Chapter 8 Remote Control Protocol cccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 Chapter 9 DataInterfac es moins Eege Eege 9 1 Chapter 10 Connector PIMOQUIUS omnia iii 10 1 Chapter 11 Fault Messages Seege EE 11 1 HT O FUSS cain ects eas cate ares ia aes aoe ies ed cel See ae eae eine ee 11 2 11 2 Transmit Warnings AR A nenene 11 4 11 3 Receive AA e A 11 5 11 4 Receive WTI Sa uo aia 11 7 T5 Unit Fauls ea as cee a ees eee aed eee eet cc 11 9 T Unt Wearing EE eene eeneg 11 10 11 7 Start up Problems ca E Rs tated Ate 11 10 Chapter 12 Specification SUMMATY coo
29. ElA 530 interfaces e IP at up to 30Mbps with ElA 530 e P with G 703 at E3 rate 5 3 2 Other Option Cards The following feature specific option cards are available e P3604 DVB S2 option card required for DVB S2 and SmartLink operation e P3609 DVB S2X option card required for DVB S2X operation This can also be used for DVB S2 to gain superior performance e g higher supported symbol rate when compared to the P3604 card e P3605 FastLink option card required for FastLink low latency Low Density Parity Check LDPC Forward Error Correction FEC operation e P3607 Paired Carrier option card required for Paired Carrier operation which overlays transmit and receive carriers in the same space segment reducing the overall required satellite bandwidth 5 3 3 BUC Power Supply Options The satellite modem may optionally be fitted with a Power Supply Unit PSU for powering a Block Up Converter BUC when operated in L band mode Refer to Table 5 1 for the available BUC power supply options Part Number BUC PSU Type P3543 200W 24V output A C in D C out P3544 200W 48V output A C in D C out P3545 48V input 200W 24V output D C in D C out P3546 48V input 200W 48V output D C in D C out P3547 48V input 200W 48V output D C in D C out Table 5 1 BUC Power Supply Options 5 4 Software Options Several software options known as Software Activated Features SAF are available as sh
30. Ethernet cable Both straight and crossover cables are supported Quad El Interface The P3706 Quad E1 interface card provides four RJ45 connectors supporting balanced E1 G 703 full or partial E1s Unbalanced G 703 is supported using an external adaptor Signal Description Electrical Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM v Data In DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX v Data Out 4 5 G 703 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Line code is fixed as HDB3 for all ports The master clock source for all ports is the lowest active port number that is configured and connected For example if port one is being used then this provides the clock source for all other ports which are slaved to this clock The slaved ports require a bearer to be generated from the modem Alternatively timing may be distributed to the terrestrial equipment modem from a single master clock source Example RJ45 connectors are shown in the following figure MALE FEMALE CT 1 8 a a L 9 12 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 10 Connector Pinouts Remote M amp C RS485 RS232 Connector The selection of RS232 or RS485 must be made via the front panel The communications protocol is defined in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Flex Satellite Modem Connector type 9 pin D female Signal name Name RS485 Paradise Shield Gnd ES SH a 3 EEN RX
31. Figure 6 48 displays the status of each modem Software Activated Feature SAF indicating whether they are on off or temporarily enabled It also shows how many test shots remain along with the remaining test time Information on temporary SAF such as any temporary licenses is also available The SAF concept is explained in Section 7 4 6 89 Temporary SAF Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Alarms SAF Basic Operation Tx path Deeg Rx path emp Data rate 155Mbps Advanced Operation xStream IP Lon Paired Carrier MA LinkGuard Roll off mp FEC amp Services 18S emp TPC emp TCM Sequential FEC HEMP DVB S2 Tx imp DVB S2 Rx FastLink LOPC mp Interfaces Quad E1 port 2 imp Quad El port 3 emp Quad El port 4 Test time remaining hours Test shots remaining o The SAF mix for this modem is YO20000000000000000000000000 FOF055E8 Figure 6 48 View gt SAF Screen 6 2 11 Test Screen The Test screens shown in Figure 6 49 and Figure 6 50 supports the following test functions Loopback This allows selection of internal loopback between the transmit and receive paths at different points in the processing chain This provides a convenient way of checking modem operation in isolation from other equipment Local loopback refers to returning local signals traveling within the modem in the direction of the satellite back towards the terrestrial interface Remote loopback refers to re
32. Generate bearer Figure 13 1 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing Screen The menu contains the following options Baseband mode Continuous selects normal continuous data interface operation Drop MUX processes a T1 or E1 bearer with Tx data being dropped from specific timeslots of the bearer on the Rx side data can be inserted back into the same timeslots or into different timeslots Audio data requires an IDR interface card to be fitted plus IBS satellite framing which provides a P1348 emulation mode It uses the audio ports normally used for the IDR audio ESC circuit as the main traffic data A 64kbps carrier can be generated comprising two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels or a 128kbps carrier can be generated comprising 64kbps data from the modem main data interface plus two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels These modes emulate the popular P1348 P1448 voice data MUX card 2048k mode This option is used to indicate whether a continuous 2048kbps traffic stream is formatted as G 732 or not G 732 CAS signalling This specifies whether Channel Associated Signalling CAS information in Timeslot 16 CAS is processed and routed through the satellite When CAS is selected the CAS will be conveyed from end to end of the link using the IBS overhead No CAS indicates that a terrestrial CAS multiframe and abcd signalling nibbles for each timeslot are not present and consequently Timeslot 16 may be dropped inserted in a similar manner to other timeslots
33. HSSI This enables the HSSI traffic interface Table 6 1 Terrestrial Interface 6 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 2 Rx Values Track Tx This is an On Off control that allows the receive path to be automatically configured to be the same as the transmit path thereby simplifying set up There are a number of exceptions including carrier frequency spectral inversion timeslots and clock settings 6 2 4 3 Tx Rx Service Off This switches the modem s Tx service off Closed network Unlike open network services Closed network in general does not add any satellite framing overhead However some framing overhead will be added for packetized data such as IP in order to allow the demodulator to synchronize with the transmitted packets Closed network plus ESC This provides a framed satellite service that incorporates an Engineering Service Channel ESC The ESC provides a secondary communications channel often used for monitor and control of remote equipment The variable rate ESC channel can provide up to 70 of the main channel rate subject to a maximum size of 115kbps It also provides a backward alarm facility that notifies upstream equipment of faults detected by downstream equipment Closed network plus ESC allows individual timeslots to be processed when using the G 703 interface IBS Intelsat Business Service IBS is an open network standard where 1 15 framing overhead is ad
34. In 1 1 mode the IP traffic addresses also need to be different for each modem In bridging modes the IP traffic address is not used but it is required for routing mode The M amp C Ethernet port must not be bridged to the IP traffic port this is controlled via the Bridge M amp C control on the Edit gt IP screen 7 11 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 4 The M amp C IP address and the traffic IP address should be on different subnets The modem defines one default gateway If the second subnet also requires a gateway then a static route should be added that defines a gateway for that subnet On the 1 1 Standby modem the carrier is muted as is the satellite receive port in order to ensure that no received data is passed out of the terrestrial port The M amp C port and the terrestrial IP traffic port are not muted If a switchover occurs when in bridging mode the Standby modem will automatically learn to bridge the traffic as necessary once it comes on line If dynamic routing is being used when a switchover occurs then the route through the newly online modem will be learned automatically If static routing is being used then the M amp C system will need to detect that a switchover has occurred and update the routes accordingly for the new IP address associated with the online modem Some network devices support route failover which automates this process In this case the M amp C system router that supports
35. Interleaver 8 x n x Depth Calculate delay time using data rate including RS overhead When fitted allows arbitrary selection of n and k to provide fully variable code rate 60 lt n lt 255 n 20 lt k lt n 2 in steps of 2 Custom Option Interleaving depth of 4 or 8 The custom option allows use of shorter code words to reduce interleaver de interleaver delay on low data rate circuits Up to 10Mbps Format Code Rate Processing Delay 12 7 Drop and Insert Option Specifications Parameter Modem Bearer Types T1 D4 T1 ESF and E1 G 732 Independent selection of arbitrary timeslots for both drop and insert The terrestrial bearer may be looped through the Drop Mux then Insert Mux or terminated after the Drop Mux and a new blank bearer generated by the insert Mux Bearer Generation The bearer generated within the Insert Mux provides full multiframe and CRC support and may be generated from the Tx clock station reference satellite clock or Internal reference In the event that the Insert Mux bearer clock is lost or AIS is supplied then the Insert Mux will switch temporarily to bearer generation mode in order to preserve the receive traffic The backup bearer may be generated from the station reference satellite clock or internal reference Fully supported with front panel display of terrestrial Terrestrial CRC error rate based on CRC T1 ESF and G 732 or Frame Alignment Word errors all bearer types The I
36. Modem ESC Aux Port A single port provides the interface for optional high rate async ESC IBS SMS option or Closed Net Plus ESC or the Intelsat low rate async IBS ESC channel Electrical Interface RS232 RS422 or RS485 external interfaces or internal link to remote M amp C port software selected Other devices externally wired in parallel with M amp C port can also be accessed remotely Async ESC Option Closed Overhead scales to provide any user Net Plus specified async ESC baud rate whatever ESC the satellite data rate ESC limit is approximately 70 of main channel rate overhead varies from lt 0 5 to gt 70 IBS option High rate async data using from 1 32 to 22 32 of the IBS overhead providing async baud rates from 0 2 to 5 1 of the terrestrial rate e g up to gt 2400 baud at 64kbps Includes modes compatible with the P300 and P400 Series P230 amp P1300 P1361 using 20 32 of the overhead IBS Aux Data Channel With IBS option and Advanced Aux option Intelsat low rate async ESC definition carried in bit 1 of TS32 providing a synchronous channel at 1 480 of the data rate allowing up to one quarter of this rate for over sampled async data Compliant with Intelsat IESS 403 low rate ESC definition 12 10 IDR Option Specifications Parameter Modem IDR ESC Audio Two 32kbps ADPCM channels Interface 4 wire 6000 7dBm to 16dBm programmable in 0 1dB st
37. Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 9 3 Priority What happens when excess bandwidth does become available i e all guaranteed bandwidths are being met and there is spare capacity in the situation where several streams have BIRs set meaning that they are all potentially competing for the same excess bandwidth This is determined by the stream Priority setting In this case the allocation of the spare bandwidth between competing schemes will be done based on the priority level allocated to each stream This is done on an absolute basis if 256kbps of bandwidth is spare and two streams both want an additional 256kbps then all 256kbps will be allocated to the stream with the higher priority The priority setting also controls latency and jitter In the situation where the transmit modem has several packets in its input buffer waiting for transmission over satellite then the packets will be sent based on their priority with the highest priority being sent first Packets are buffered up to a limit after which packets may be dropped The priority value ranges from zero to seven with zero being the highest priority note that this is the opposite order of prioritization to IEEE 802 1p priority tagging A default data stream exists for any packets not explicitly part of a defined data stream These get assigned the lowest available priority namely seven 7 8 9 4 Stream Classification How does the modem know which packets belong
38. Operating Handbook 6 2 6 5 RADIUS Server Timeout Range 1 to 60 seconds step size 1 second Description Controls the timeout when connecting to the RADIUS server Two attempts will be made before reverting to use the fallback RADIUS server If the fallback server connection attempts also fail then the user will be presented with the standard non RADIUS login prompt Table 6 36 RADIUS Server Timeout 6 2 6 6 Remote M amp C Interface Table 6 37 shows the Remote M amp C interface options with respect to the serial M amp C interface of the modem Tables 6 39 and 6 40 describe the options for assigning an RS485 address to the serial M amp C interface and settings its baud rate respectively RS232 This sets the serial M amp C interface to RS232 This allows the modem to be controlled using Paradise Universal Protocol PUP commands as specified in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Series modems If the serial M amp C interface is internally or externally looped to the modem s ESC interface then the commands can be forwarded to the far end of the link in order to control either the remote modem or other equipment RS485 This sets the serial M amp C interface to RS485 This allows the modem to be controlled using Paradise Universal Protocol PUP commands as specified in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Series modems If the serial M amp C interface is internally or externall
39. Other Remove the mains input lead wait for a short period of Unit fails to boot due to an time and then re power the unit As soon as the invalid configuration but initialising screen is reached enter 1 3 7 and 9 using passes the initial built in the keypad The scrolling full stops seen after the test proceeding to the initialising message should change to asterisks and initialising screen the Modem will boot The invalid configuration will be stored to memory entitled deleted_date Hold down the main button whilst applying power choose the front panel menu option rescue connect a Software upgrade fails or PC to the top Ethernet port IP traffic and browse to the unit fails to boot default IP address of the modem 10 0 70 1 login as normal then upload the new software using the upgrade button 11 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 12 Specification Summary 12 1 Common Main Specifications Parameter Modem Modulation BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK 8QAM 16APSK 16QAM 32APSK 64QAM IF Frequency Range 50 to 9OMHz and 100 to180MHz L band Frequency Range 950 to 2250 MHz Frequency Resolution 100Hz Traffic Interface Electrical Ethernet 10 100 1000 BaseT IP Traffic on RJ45 with link and traffic indicators Traffic Interface Options RS422 including X 21 DCE and DTE emulation V 35 and RS232 on ElA530 connector 25 pin fe
40. Q Does the modem redundancy configuration affect Paired Carrier operation A No Paired Carrier works equally as well in 1 1 and 1 N modem redundancy systems The standby modem will have to go through the normal acquisition process when it comes on traffic While it is in standby it is not possible for the demodulator to lock it cannot cancel the unwanted carrier since in principle it can only cancel its own transmission Paradise has therefore muted various spurious alarms that would otherwise be reported for the standby modem in this situation 7 39 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Q Can remotely control the Paired CarrierTM function A Yes Paired CarrierT can be controlled remotely in the same way as any other modem function via RS232 RS485 web browser or SNMP Q Can add Paired Carrier into an existing network A Yes bandwidth savings can be made with existing networks but a link budget analysis must be made to assess the suitability and benefits Q Surely there is some disadvantage in using Paired CarrierTM A Paired Carrier has a minimal impact on Eb No for a desired BER but typically between 0 15dB and 0 5dB extra carrier power is required to be transmitted on satellite to overcome the imperfections in the signal cancellation process Also of course power is needed for the second carrier Q What prerequisites exist for using Paired Carrier A It requires a full dupl
41. Rate 6 2 6 7 Modem Identity The Modem identifier is a user assigned text string that is typically used to uniquely identify the modem satellite service or location It is displayed as the D field on the left hand side of every web page 6 2 7 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C gt SNMP Screen The Edit gt Unit gt M8 C gt SNMP screen is shown in Figure 6 11 6 33 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook M amp C EEE ME Eds Miscellaneous SNMP System location Modem location Administrator contact information Read only access community name public Read only source identifier default Read write access many private a Read write source identifier default vi trap Rx H V1 trap community public V2 trap Rx 7 V2 trap community public B E Default trap sink community public V3 username V3 password V3 authentication Enable V3 encryption SNMP agent run control C Download MIB files Figure 6 11 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C gt SNMP Screen The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can be configured for use with SNMP v1 v2c and v3 The modem s SNMP configuration settings have the standard meanings defined by the relevant SNMP standards and are therefore not described in detail The community names represent passwords that must be present in each SNMP read or write requests in order for the commands to be executed The source identifier fields are used to define the
42. SE SES Buffer slips are occurring too frequently this could threshold set for the indicate that the clock accuracy is less than expected deferred alarm Rx warning Rx exceeds 4 5Mbps limit in TPC 5 16 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded E E Rx warning Rx exceeds 6 5Mbps limit in TPC 21 44 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded or 2 3 Rx warning Rx exceeds F 7 7Mbos limit in TPC 1 2 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded M Rx warning Rx exceeds a 12Mbps limit in TPC 7 8 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded M Rx warning Rx exceeds i 33Mbps limit in TCM 2 3 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme exceeded M Rx warning Rx data rate Configuration error data rate for terrestrial interface M outside interface range exceeded Rx warning The remote Eb No has fallen below the user threshold Rx warning The receive Eb No is worse than the user threshold set for the deferred alarm Rx warning Rx symbol The modems current configuration exceeds the E rate outside range permissible symbol rate check the configuration The clock selected as the Receive data output clock has failed The modem has switched to using a backup clock generated by the Rx PLL to preserve the receive traffic Rx warning Selected Rx This fault can only occur if the source is the same output clock has failed frequency as the Rx data rate otherwise the clo
43. TT Header compression ACM mode IP Addresses M amp C IP address 101012258 Traffic IP address 0 0 0 0 Satellite IP address 0 0 0 0 Modem IP gateway 10 102 225 9 IP Miscellaneous Bridge Mac C Round trip satellite delay 1520 ms Payload compression ET ACM rain fade margin joo i dB M amp C IP subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Traffic IP subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Satellite IP subnet mask 255 255 265 252 IP encapsulation type MPE MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Encapsulation PID Ed Weighted Qos speed duplex Auto v IP traffic Ethernet speed duplex Auto v IPv4 IPv6 mode IPv4 only v Ethernet MTU 2000 j bytes Figure 6 22 Edit gt IP Screen 6 2 2 1 IP Mode Table 6 50 shows the P mode options The operation of the M amp C and IP Traffic Ethernet ports is summarized in Table 6 51 Bridge mode In this mode the modem acts as an Ethernet bridge preserving the original Ethernet frames including additional fields such as VLAN and MPLS headers over satellite Routing mode In this mode IP packets are forwarded based on the contents of the modem s routing table which can be configured manually with static routes or controlled dynamically by enabling dynamic routing Dynamic routing populates the routing table based on information forwarded by other routers in the network The modem operates as a two port router in this mode with separate terrestrial and satellite IP addresses
44. Tx FEC frame size Rx FEC frame size Sweep Width Sweep mode Normal 16kHz ze Sweep width E T kHz Carrier Break Acknowledge power break Acknowledge Reed Solomon Figure 6 6 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service gt Advanced Screen 6 2 5 1 DVB S2 Tx Rx Pilot Tones Pilots are an On Off control that controls whether DVB S2 pilots which are unmodulated symbols are injected into the carrier on a regular basis in order to help the demodulator lock onto the carrier The pilots are 36 symbols long and are injected every 1440 symbols representing an additional overhead of around 2 4 Pilots are recommended for FEC rates below rate Y and for situations where the receive signal may be degraded 6 20 Tx RS FEC Rx RS FEC Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 5 2 DVB S2 Tx Rx Frame Size Short This represents a frame size of 16 200 bits per frame Normal This represents a frame size of 64 800 bits per frame This is more bandwidth efficient than short frames but has four times the latency As a guideline short frames have a latency of around 25ms at 1Mbps whereas the latency for normal frames is around 100ms at 1Mbps The latency will halve as data rate doubles Very short This represents a frame size of 5 400 bits reducing latency to 33 of the standard DVB S2 Short frame Ultra short This represents a frame size of 3 240 bits reducing latency to 20 of the standard DVB S2 Short fra
45. a User Requested Change The box will change back to its standard background color when the modem has implemented the change Note that each change must be fully completed before the next change can be made 6 2 4 1 Terrestrial Interface Table 6 1 lists the different terrestrial interface options that are available With the exception of IP which is provided as standard they require the relevant interface card option to be fitted Up to four different interface cards can be fitted IP This enables the Ethernet traffic interface G 703 This enables the G 703 traffic interface Quad E1 This enables the Quad El traffic interface STM 1 0C 3 This enables the STM 1 OC 3 traffic interface and requires an STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet interface card to be fitted The correct SFP transceiver module must be fitted to the interface card SFP cage Optical Ethernet This enables the Optical Ethernet traffic interface and requires an STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet interface card to be fitted The correct SFP transceiver module must be fitted to the interface card SFP cage RS422 This enables the RS422 traffic interface and requires an EIA 530 interface card to be fitted RS232 This enables the RS232 traffic interface and requires an EIA 530 interface card to be fitted V 35 This enables the V 35 traffic interface and requires an EIA 530 interface card to be fitted LVDS This enables the LVDS traffic interface
46. an associated subnet mask that delimits the particular host subnet from the overall network For example if an address is 10 3 0 0 and the mask is 255 255 0 0 then any packet containing the subnet 10 3 will be matched To match on the whole of an address the mask must be set to 255 255 255 255 If matching on a port is also selected then the packet will only be classified as part of the data stream if both the address and the port number match A maximum of 16 data streams are supported each of which has its own CIR BIR and priority level settings The example in Figure 7 11 shows a traffic shaping scheme based on matching on source address and source port number Note the Enable shaping checkbox which controls whether traffic shaping is enabled or not The Input mode can be set the entry method to bits per second or percentage input Using percentages may be useful when using ACM where the bandwidth varies dynamically In addition input can be specified as percentages but using a fixed CIR in bits per second allowing absolute guaranteed bandwidths to be allocated with excess bandwidth being distributed using percentages 7 25 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Enable traffic Quality of service scheme IP Address y shaping fe Quality of service IP adores Both source and destination port Input mode Percentage y Gr CIR 96 BIR 96 Priority Src Address Src Mask Sro Port
47. and discarded Since null packets contain no useful data then discarding them can save bandwidth Strip amp Insert The strip and insert option strips all MPEG2 null packets from the incoming terrestrial data stream It also inserts MPEG2 null packets into the stream of packets transmitted to satellite in such a way as to match exactly the required transmit symbol rate in the event that there are less packets than required to fill the satellite pipe Table 6 64 Null Packet Insertion 6 2 3 7 PCR Restamping PCR restamping is an On Off control that controls whether MPEG2 Program Clock Reference PCR timestamps in received MPEG2 transport stream packets via the ASI or IP interfaces are adjusted for any delay introduced by the modem By adjusting the 6 62 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook timestamps as required potential jitter in the play out of the packets at the receiver decoder can be eliminated 6 2 3 8 MPEG Over IP Type UDP TS This indicates that the MPEG2 transport stream packets are encapsulated into into IP packets using the UDP protocol UDP RTP TS This indicates that the MPEG2 transport stream packets are encapsulated into into IP packets using the UDP and RTP protocols Table 6 65 MPEG Over IP Type When sending MPEG2 packets encapsulated inside IP packets the modem can reduce the satellite transmission overhead by removing the IP headers and sending only the
48. as an antenna pointing signal when the demod is unlocked It responds to composite power in approximately a 2MHz bandwidth around the nominal Rx carrier frequency To externally inhibit the Transmit carrier either apply a TTL CMOS low signal to pin 7 or short pin 7 to ground for example with an external relay closure All relay contacts are rated 30V DC 2A or 125VAC 0 4A Note N O means normally open in the non fail state of the modem relays energised when power is removed the relays fall back to the non normal ie non energised alarm state 10 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Async ESC Connector This connector comprises e An RS232 RS422 RS485 async port for use on either the ESC or Aux channels e An RS232 serial port currently unused e An RS422 Station Clock input ASYNC ESC CONNECTOR RS422 Async port for ESC or Aux channel RS485 2 a Async ESC Aux Input to satellite 9 b Async ESC Aux Input to satellite 3 a Async ESC Aux Output from satellite ee _ifeential Station gett Differential Station Clock This provides a RS422 compatible station clock in addition to the unbalanced 750 station clock BNC connector Async Port for ESC or Aux Channels The modem has two fully independent data channels that may be carried over the satellite within any overhead that is added These are referred to as the ESC and Aux channels The shared interface on this connector al
49. be configured to provide either the IBS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility or a higher rate synchronous channel within the IBS overhead Rx IF Input This is a 500 750 BNC female connector The carrier signal level at the input of the modem must be in the following range Minimum signal level 115 10 log symbol rate dBm Maximum signal level 80 10 log symbol rate dBm 5 12 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The maximum wanted to composite power level that is supported with no implementation loss is defined by the equation Maximum wanted to composite power level 94 10 log symbol rate dBm The maximum composite power level is 10dBm Rx L band Input This is a 500 N type female connector The carrier signal level at the input of the modem must be in the following range Minimum signal level 130 10 log symbol rate dBm Maximum signal level 80 10 log symbol rate dBm The maximum wanted to composite power level that is supported with no implementation loss is defined by the equation Maximum wanted to composite power level 102 10 log symbol rate dBm The maximum composite power level is 10dBm Fans There are two side mounted high performance fans that draw air in through ventilation holes in the sides of the unit and expel the air outwards The side vents must not be blocked 1 1 Redundancy Connector The modem has a built in 1 1 redundancy controller that con
50. be erased or overwritten Configuration memory names are restricted to alphanumeric characters STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP x Rx aici Memories R divsbiei store Upload Please click the required tab Figure 6 27 Edit gt Memories Screen 6 2 8 1 Edit gt Memories gt Recall Screen The Edit gt Memories gt Recall screen shown in Figure 6 28 displays all of the configuration memories that are stored on the modem A specific configuration memory can be made active by selecting the associated Recall button The Delete button can be used to delete a configuration memory 6 74 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Paired Carrier Memories MRE Download Recall Saved Configuration Configuration File Size Date Select 15052_Tx_Rx_10MHzRefTest_2 1693 bytes 11 Dec 2012 03 28 FTwork 1747 bytes 01 Jan 1970 00 02 Functional_Test 637 bytes 24 Dec 2012 17 36 Figure 6 28 Edit gt Memories gt Recall Screen 6 2 8 2 Edit gt Memories gt Recall gt Advanced Reversionary Control Screen The Edit gt Memories gt Recall gt Advanced screen shown in Figure 6 29 supports a method for recovering a remote modem from a failure during a change to the modem s configuration In essence this works in a similar way to the Cisco Reload command where a known trusted configuration is loaded after a defined timeout period in the event that the reload operation is not cancelled by the operator in a
51. bridge then one Ethernet port is dedicated to IP traffic and the other to M amp C control as labeled on the connectors To communicate with the modem itself for M amp C purposes an IP address and subnet mask must be set Note that setting an IP address to 0 0 0 0 causes the modem to request an IP address from a Dynamic Host Control Porotocol DHCP server on the network Static routes are supported allowing routing decisions to be made based on a set of explicit routing rules that can be entered via the web user interface Dynamic routing is also supported The use of a default gateway IP address is supported When a gateway is specified then it provides a next hop IP address for all destinations that are not on the local subnet This is usually the address of a router that has been set up to forward packets to the correct network The bridge maintains information on how to forward frames based on replies that are received from each device in the network The M amp C port can be taken out of the bridge via the Bridge M amp C port menu option in which case each port has its own IP address 7 19 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 2 IP Addressing The two ports on the IP card are bridged together acting as a two port switch This is true regardless of what bridging or routing mode is selected In bridging mode IP addresses are not used so there is no restriction on what subnets are off the two traffic card
52. card is directly connected through to the ESC channel This interface on the modem provides the IBS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility The ESC and Aux functions are mutually exclusive unless an IDR card is fitted If an IDR card is fitted then the Aux port can provide 32kbps or 64kbps access to the IDR overhead in place of one or both of the IDR 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channels or it can provide either the IBS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility or a higher rate synchronous channel within the IBS overhead 13 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IDR Screen The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IDR screen shown in Figure 13 4 controls the overhead in IDR mode allowing the IDR 8kbps ESC channel and audio channels to be set up and the routing of multiple backward alarms It also allows Aux data to be allocated in place of one or both of the IDR audio channels if these are not used or it can be used to reduce the standard 96kbps overhead to 64kbps or 32kbps Tx Rx Memories Paired Carrier Redundancy Framing BUC LNB OP RE MOrEMES PAGES Overhead IDR Tx IDR 8k ESC mode Rx IDR 8k ESC mode Tx ESC interface baud rate Rx ESC interface baud rate Tx ESC interface character Rx ESC interface character length length Tx ESC interface parity Rx ESC interface parity polarity polarity Tx IDR ESC audio data encoding Rx IDR ESC audio data encoding Tx IDR Aux data Rx IDR Aux data Tx ESC level chi 0 0 dB Rx ESC level chi 0 0
53. device such as a router must be present to filter out any traffic that is intended only for the other remote modems When VLAN filtering is enabled each remote modem can be assigned a VLAN id which is used by the hub to tag each packet destined for any device attached to a network off that particular remote modem The tags are added by the hub Tx modem and removed by the remote modem The remote modem uses the tag to filter out unwanted data that has been broadcast indiscriminately to all remote modems Setting a value for the VLAN ID is required for remote modems only Assigning a VLAN ID to a hub modem has no effect The VLAN ID should be used to uniquely identify each remote modem It is used to filter wanted from unwanted IP packets in point to multipoint systems where there is a direct return path The VLAN IDs of remote modems are automatically learnt by the hub Tx modem and all traffic destined for a particular remote modem will be tagged at the hub The VLAN tags are removed by the remote modems prior to onward transmission 6 2 3 6 Null Packet Insertion Off When using the ASI or IP terrestrial interfaces with MPEG2 transport stream packets any MPEG2 null packets within the incoming terrestrial data stream will be left untouched and will therefore be transmitted over satellite when null packet insertion is set to Off On When null packet insertion is set to On any MPEG2 null packets within the data stream will be stripped out
54. equipment in the transmit or receive chain that has introduced a spectral inversion Paradise recommends keeping the signals in the space segment non inverted particularly when Paired Carrier is being used If the ground segment uplink equipment contains a spectral inversion then transmit spectral inversion should be enabled in the modem to correct for it Similarly if the ground segment downlink equipment contains a spectral inversion e g due to an inverting LNB then receive spectral inversion should be enabled in the modem to correct for it 6 2 4 16 IF L band Output Power Range 0 0dBm to 25 0dBm step size 0 1dBm Description This sets the transmitted output power when using IF Table 6 16 IF Output Power Range 0 0dBm to 40 0dBm step size 0 1dBm Description This is the transmitted output power when using L band Table 6 17 L band Output Power 6 19 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 17 Modem BUC Carrier These allow the modem and BUC carriers to be switched on off independently of each other BUC carrier control requires a control channel i e FSK or RS485 to exist between the modem and the BUC 6 2 5 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service gt Advanced Screen The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service gt Advanced screen is shown in Figure 6 6 Tx Rx Paired Carrier Memories Redundancy Service AUPC Advanced DYB 52 Tx pilot tones Rx pilot tones
55. fault occurs with respect to the online modem The types of faults that will cause a switchover are configurable Both unit and traffic faults can cause a switchover Traffic 7 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook faults that are external to the equipment that affect both units simultaneously do not result in any switchover L band services can be configured to switch with the modem or to remain with the online modem after it has failed In order to minimize unnecessary switchovers a modem that experiences a failure will remain offline even if it returns to its normal working state If it does return to a normal state then it will act as the Standby unit 7 3 3 Setup Procedure A 1 1 redundant modem pair is set up as follows 1 AON 7 3 4 Ensure that both modems are running the same software version and are configured identically See Section 7 3 4 for details of how to configure IP addresses in modem redundancy configurations Connect a suitable cable between the 9 way 1 1 connectors on the two modems Connect the terrestrial data interfaces for the two modems in parallel nd configure the two units alike Suitable adapter cables are available from Teledyne Paradise Datacom If the Ethernet traffic port is used on the modem then the two traffic ports may be connected to a hub or other multi port LAN device using RJ45 crossover cables Connect the two transmit IF ports to the input ports of a suitable s
56. for evaluating ACM in a representative test scenario prior to deployment see Section 6 2 2 7 6 84 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Minute Hour Day Month 10 000 9 000 8 000 7 000 6 000 5 000 4 000 3 000 2 000 1 000 o Terrestrial Data Rate kbps 14 00 16 00 18 00 20 00 22 00 00 00 02 00 04 00 06 00 08 00 10 00 12 00 Modem Time Min Max Average 27 March 2013 Figure 6 41 ACM Terrestrial Data Rate Graph Minute Hour Day Month a ey GE E IS a a 4 000 3 000 2 000 Terrestrial Data Rate kbps 1 000 Q Modem Time Min Max Average IO aos ia Ia a Seo Isis R A dido ISI tas 14 00 D8 March 2013 Figure 6 42 ACM Terrestrial Data Rate Graph Short time period 6 2 10 4 Other Time based Graphs A number of time based graphs can be displayed Graphical values are stored for 31 calendar days or until the modem is powered down The recording of all values occurs automatically at all times once the modem is powered on and is not dependent on whether the graphs are being viewed or not 6 85 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The web interface supports display of the following time based graphs Modem internal temperature The modem received signal Eb No The modem received power level Receive frequency offset from centre frequency LinkGuard interfe
57. from the larger of the transmit and receive symbol rates and roll off factors i e occupied bandwidth 6 68 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Table 6 73 indicates the circumstances under which modem signal inversions are required in relation to Paired Carrier operation Paired Carrier BUC LNB Tx Modem Px Modem Inversion Inversion Working Yes Non Inverting Non Inverting No No Yes Non Inverting Inverting No Yes Yes Inverting Inverting No No No Inverting Non Inverting N A N A Table 6 73 Paired Carrier Spectral Inversion Control PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR FIRST TIME SETUP OF A PAIRED CARRIER LINK In relation to Paired Carrier generally there are no restrictions on how the overlapped carriers are brought up and the satellite link is established However the following guidelines may be useful in proving correct Paired Carrier operation as part of the overall initial link deployment process Once correct operation is established then Paired Carrier can be switched on and off or reconfigured just like any other modem feature You must get each link working correctly as a normal link prior to switching Paired Carrier on You must ensure that there is no spectral inversion in the RF chain if there is then this must be corrected by re inverting it for Paired Carrier operation to work see the above table 1 Ensure Paired Carrier
58. high stability clock can be used in conjunction with any modem terrestrial interface such as IP The method involves extending a G 703 T1 or E1 timing reference to the remote end of a satellite link regardless of actual data rate required for the link This is achieved via a G 703 clock extension feature that propagates a high stability reference from the hub to the remote It requires a high stability E1 T1 reference signal ideally from a GPS receiver to be fed to the hub modem via the G 703 balanced or unbalanced connectors The remote modem will then generate a T1 E1 output signal synchronized to the local modem s GPS signal This signal can then be used for synchronizing the remote site equipment To set the G 703 clock extension in Tx set the Tx clock source to Internal at which point the option to forward the G 703 clock as a clock reference over satellite will be presented To use the G 703 clock extension in Rx set the Rx clock source to Satellite at which point the option to generate a G 703 clock from the satellite clock will be presented This will result in the modem generating an Alt1 0 timing reference signal at either T1 or El through the G 703 interface card 7 2 Automatic Uplink Power Control Authorisation from the satellite operator should be sought before AUPC is activated 7 2 1 Introduction Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC provides a mechanism to counteract changes in atmospheric conditions suc
59. is displayed the security warning message shown in Figure 6 36 will be displayed This is because the Java applet requires privileges to run and therefore includes a security certificate You should select Yes in order to be able to view graphs Minimizing Security Warnings When Viewing Graphs When using Internet Explorer it is possible to minimize security alerts related to the download of Java applets used for graphing purposes This is done be installing a security certificate from the modem onto the browser device The procedure is as follows e The Edit gt IP gt Advanced screen contains an option at the bottom of the screen labeled Download root authority security certificate Selecting this option will download a zip file to the web browser device e On opening the zip file a file named pardise root cert der crt will be seen Doubling clicking on the file name will result in being asked whether you want to open the file e Opening the file will then allow the certificate to be installed using the Windows Certificate Import Wizard Once the certificate has been stored on the web browser device then security warnings similar to that shown in Figure 6 36 will no longer be displayed Currently this way of minimizing security warnings is supported for Internet Explorer only 6 80 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Warning Security 4 x A Do you want to trust the signed applet distributed b
60. is the measured offset from the expected carrier centre frequency It indicates any frequency shift that is introduced by the satellite and frequency conversion equipment 6 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Receive Doppler buffer usage This indicates how full the receive Doppler buffer is This is displayed only when a receive Doppler buffer is being used to compensate for movements in the satellite i e when the Rx clock source is set to something other than Satellite Number of Doppler buffer overflows and underflows These represent the number of times the receive buffer has slipped as a result of overflows and underflows These counts are reset to zero when the demodulator goes out of lock They can also be cleared using the front panel menus Receive DVB S2 baseband frames and errors These indicate the number of DVB S2 baseband frames and baseband frame errors respectively that have been received since the Rx service was started and give an indication of the quality of the service The Reset baseband counts button can be used to set these counts back to zero 6 2 2 3 Status Paired Carrier The Paired Carrier section of the Status screen is displayed and continually updated with the following information while Paired Carrier is enabled Paired Carrier status This is shown as Locked when Paired Carrier has locked to one of the two overlapping carriers and is shown as Unlocked when Paired
61. level 18 9dBm Modulation 16APSK Code rate 0 851 Es No gt 20dB MER 22 7dB EVM 6 5 Eb No 16 8dB Q channel channel BER lt 1 0E 12 Figure 6 39 Rx Constellation Monitor The Rx Constellation Monitor can be used to check for correct modem operation including checking for signal distortion and phase noise The persistence mode is useful for showing any long term effects due to phase noise and interference Excessive phase noise can cause cycle skips seen as unwanted rotations within the constellation 6 2 10 3 IP Graphs Figure 6 38 shows an example of an IP throughput graph IP graphs support the display of throughput including errored and dropped packets for transmit and receive in bits per second and packets per second for the terrestrial and satellite ports The throughput can be viewed in real time and over one day and 30 day time periods It is also possible to view the throughput associated with each individual traffic stream as classified by the traffic shaping feature 6 83 Symbol rate 39999954sps Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Graphs Spectrum Bit Rate t Terrestrial 1 Terrestrial 2 Satellite 1hour 24 hours 30 days Weg dE E A N AEN ANNEN ID IED ARA e 17 500 15 000 12 500 10 000 kBits Sec 7 300 5 000 2 500 0 15 35 15 40 15 45 15 50 15 55 16 00 16 05 16 10 16 15 16 20 16 25 16 30 30 seconds interval Fr
62. lock than would otherwise be the case Note that the ACM control process has its own non configurable operating margin built in which will cope with Es No changes of up to 1dB s and therefore the ACM rain fade margin should be used only on links that have the potential for particularly severe rain fades Setting an ACM margin that is higher than necessary will reduce the benefits of using ACM since non optimal modcods may be used due to the need to maintain a larger margin between the actual Es No and the Es No required by the dynamically selected modcods Table 6 54 Round trip Satellite Delay 6 2 2 9 M amp C IP Address Subnet Mask amp Modem IP Gateway M amp C 10 0 70 1 IP Address Default Description This sets the IP address for remote control When the M amp C and traffic Ethernet ports are bridged together then this address is used for both M amp C purposes and satellite traffic An IP address of 0 0 0 0 causes the modem to request its IP address from a Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP server on the network removing the need to allocate static IP addresses to each modem The allocated IP address can be seen on the View gt Unit screen A request to the DHCP server is made every minute until a reply is received When IPv6 support is selected on the menus then additional address entry options are provided When changing the IP address devices communicating with the modem may take several minutes to rec
63. on IDR card not shared ESC Aux port of base unit IDR option also adds sync IBS mode configurable to use between 1 32 and 21 32 of the IBS overhead providing a full sync Aux port at between 0 2 and 4 3 of the main data rate Aux port provides satellite timing information for P1500 slave Frequency Standard when not configured for Aux data access 12 11 BERT Option Specifications Parameter Modem BER Channel The BERT may operate through main traffic ESC data or Aux data channels Use of ESC amp Aux data channels allows continuous real traffic BER performance monitoring while the modem carries traffic Test Patterns 2 1 2 1 2 1 and others compatible with common standalone BER testers Results Display of error count and average BER Autolog Automatic logging of average BER and other parameters at regular intervals 12 9 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 12 AUPC Specifications Parameter Modem Modes of Operation Monitor of remote Eb No and BER only full remote Eb No maintenance Unidirectional or Bi directional operation Communication Link Utilises asynchronous ESC channel on IBS SMS IDR and Closed Network plus ESC carriers ESC from 300 baud i e overheads down to less than 1 User Parameters Target Eb No positive power offset negative power offset 12 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installatio
64. pages Standard Lead A constellation monitor serial lead part number M1479 is available from Teledyne Paradise Datacom This lead provides the required connections to a 25 pin D type for a PC connection note that this is currently unused by the modem and three BNCs for connecting to an oscilloscope for the constellation monitor 10 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook ESC Aux and Backward Alarms Connector This connector is fitted as part of the IDR option Note that when this option is fitted the ESC and Aux ports on this connector replace the shared ESC Aux port on the Async ESC connector Connector type 50 pin D type female ESC Port Sync Async RS485 RS422 RS232 Usage Usage L uf Tx ESC Clock out A Tx ESC Clock out Tx ESC DatainA Tx ESC Data in 32 uf Rx ESC Clock out A Rx ESC Clock out a o menan eco O meas fue e o EEN e o peoe e U indicates lines are optional In Closed Net Plus ESC mode the variable rate async ESC is available on this port In IBS modes high rate async ESC is available on this port In IDR modes this port provides access to the 8kbps IDR ESC channel This can either by synchronous at 8kbps or if the Async ESC feature is available asynchronous at up to 4800 or 9600 Baud 10 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Aux Port Pinter Syne 7eme eiee noz une SIT oan ice SIT eneen o a Il o poena CTN C
65. path equipment failure the modem Tx failing or a satellite failure Check the modem Tx path status Check the Tx IF output from the modem is connected to the upconverter equipment and onwards Monitor the Tx carrier or distant Rx if possible with a spectrum analyser A multiframe backward alarm has been detected at the Rx input indicating that equipment downstream of the transmit path has failed to synchronise to the CAS multiframe and is returning an alarm This could be caused by any equipment from the Tx modulator onwards but is unlikely to be other than the Tx mod the Rx demod or further down the Rx path This indicates which of the four backward alarms are active at the Rx input This indicates that equipment downstream of the transmit path ie the distant end Rx path or further downstream has failed and is returning an alarm In Multidestinational circuits this may not correspond to the Tx path of this modem The fault may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the relevant modem Tx output failing Check the relevant modem Tx path indicates OK Check the Tx IF output from the modem is connected to the upconverter equipment and onwards and monitor the Tx carrier or distant Rx if possible with a spectrum analyser This will only be displayed if the modem if fitted with an interface that provides four ports for separate input and output of separate Tx Drop and Rx Insert PCM bearers It indicates a backward a
66. ports In routing mode since the IP traffic card has a single address covering both ports there can only ever be one direct subnet off the two ports e With an IP card fitted and the base modem M amp C port out of the bridge then the base modem IP traffic port is not addressable e With an IP card fitted and the two base modem ports bridged then base modem access can be used for M amp C only no base modem data will be passed over satellite e If no IP traffic card is fitted and the M amp C port is out of the bridge i e the traffic port has its own IP address then the IP traffic port and M amp C port must be on different subnets because otherwise the modem does not know which of the two ports to respond out of 7 8 2 1 Gateways There is a single gateway address for the modem 7 8 3 Throughput Performance Actual throughput performance depends on a number of factors including one way two way traffic packet size data rates and the mixture of IP features switched on There are endless combinations and therefore it is strongly recommended that empirical testing is undertaken prior to deployment to ensure that the required level of service can be provided The modem can process up to 150 000 packets per second In Trunking mode this increases to 500 000 packets to second It is good practice to put a switch or router between the modem and local network in order to minimize the number of packets the modem has to process as incidental n
67. route failover should be configured to include another route in the routing table with a higher metric or distance for the route that uses the Standby modem s IP traffic address The switchover to using the Standby modem will then be automatic when it detects the path through the primary modem is no longer available 7 3 4 2 1 NIP Operation The following rules should be observed when using 1 N redundancy for IP 5 In 1 N mode the M amp C IP addresses need to be different for each modem 6 In 1 N mode the IP traffic addresses should be set to be the same in both modems The IP traffic port on the Standby modem is physically isolated from the network via a relay contact which ensures that having identical IP addresses does not cause any problems 7 The M amp C Ethernet port must not be bridged to the IP traffic port this is controlled via the Bridge M amp C control on the Edit gt P screen 8 The M amp C IP address and the traffic IP address should be on different subnets The modem defines one default gateway If the second subnet also requires a gateway then a static route should be added that defines a gateway for that subnet On the 1 N Standby modem the carrier is muted The IP traffic port remains active but is physically isolated from the network The M amp C port is not muted allowing the M amp C system to control the Standby modem at all times The switchover operation in relation to bridging and routing is simi
68. shown in Figure 6 21 This allows a low power spread spectrum signal containing user identification information to be superimposed on the Tx carrier When used with a suitable decoder the information can be used to identify the source of satellite carriers that are interfering with other satellite services Unit Paired Carrier Memories Redundancy Tx Predistorter Upgrade Miscellaneous Carrier ID Alarms Station Clock Carrier ID Message Contents Global unique identifier 119 00 11 29 FF FF 40 01 4 Latitude PO 0 00 Minutes South Y Degrees Longitude 0 1 24 Minutes East Y Degrees Custom message Telephone number Carrier ID Control Carrier ID Disabled v Figure 6 21 Edit gt Unit gt Carrier ID Screen 6 45 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 1 1 Carrier ID Global Unique Identifier The Carrier ID Global unique identifier is a unique ID for the modem lts value is fixed during the manufacturing process and cannot be changed The unique identifier is transmitted as part of the Carrier ID information allows the modem manufacturer and the specific modem to be traced 6 2 1 2 Carrier ID Latitude and Longitude The Carrier ID Latitude and Longitude fields allow the user to enter the geographic position of the modem This information is transmitted as part of the Carrier ID and allows a Carrier ID decoder to identify the location from which an interfering carrier is being genera
69. significant effect on acquisition time H using a round trip delay then try switching to using location information e Reduce the sweep width via the Sweep width setting on the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced menu as this may significantly speed up the acquisition process e Check for signs of signal degradation such as poor Eb No values or poor spectrum and constellation 16 If 1 1 or 1 N redundancy is being used Paradise recommends setting the modems to switch on Unit Faults only i e setting the Tx and Rx fail switchovers off via the Edit gt Redundancy menu option This is because when a modem is in standby no transmit carrier is generated therefore there is nothing for Paired Carrier to cancel and the standby demodulator will not lock because it cannot separate the two interfering carriers from the online modem and the remote modem In this case a switchover from the online modem can never occur since the standby modem is from a logical point of view faulty and a switchover will not occur to a standby modem deemed faulty Please refer to application note AN_027A 1 1 quick start guide for further details 17 When using Paired Carrier with IP as the terrestrial interface type Paradise recommends setting the master hub transmit timing to Internal the hub and remote receive clocking to Satellite and the remote transmit clocking to Rx reference This ensures only one master clock is providing timing for both modems and can prevent
70. situation because there is no carrier being received from the distant modem you may for example want to set the AUPC uplink level from the local modem to its nominal level since there is no indication in this scenario of a problem with the distant modem receiving the local modem s carrier Set Nominal to The AUPC delta power is set to zero causing the carrier to return to its nominal power level Freeze at current value The carrier power is frozen at its current value Set to max The AUPC delta power is set to the maximum power limit as defined by Maximum AUPC power offset Table 6 27 Local Demod Unlocked Action 6 2 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt BUC LNB Screen The Edit gt Unit gt BUC LNB screen is shown in Figure 6 8 Tx Rx Paired Carrier Memories Redundancy STE GEA AT vu cine Type BUC LNB BUC interface LNB type None Ni BUC LO frequency 10 0000000 GHz LNB LO frequency 0 0000000 GHz BUC attenuation 3 dB Services 10MH2 to BUC Mute BUC services in Standby DC to BUC DC to LNB 10MH2 to LNB Mute LNB services in Standby Figure 6 8 Edit gt Tx Rx gt BUC LNB Screen 6 2 4 1 BUC Interface BUC FSK This indicates that a BUC is fitted that has FSK communications to the modem BUC no This indicates that a BUC is fitted but has no communications to the comms modem No BUC This indicates that no BUC is fitted Table 6 28 BUC Interface 6 25
71. the Rx data rate then the station clock is used directly If the station clock is a different frequency to the Rx data rate then an internal conversion to the 6 14 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook correct frequency is made This requires the receive buffer to be set as per the Tx Clock In option Table 6 7 Rx Clock Source 6 2 4 9 Tx Rx FEC Type FastLink This enables Paradise s FastLink low latency Low Density Parity Check LDPC FEC FastLink gives BER performance approaching that of conventional LDPC but with latency nearer to that of TPC In addition FastLink supports modes available on the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service gt Advanced menu that optimize either BER performance or latency even further giving the flexibility to match performance more closely to the constraints of the satellite application SmartLink This selects SmartLink which extends DVB S2 from working with only packetized data such as IP to working with any terrestrial interface Using SmartLink in Closed network provides a normal DVB S2 service with no additional overhead However SmartLink can also support the use of traditional service features not normally available with DVB S2 such as Drop and Insert ESC channel remote M amp C control AUPC IDR audio channels etc SmartLink is described in Section 7 9 TPC This selects the Turbo Product Code TPC FEC Viterbi This selects the Vite
72. the current value and move backwards to the previous screen 6 3 1 3 Alphanumeric Keys The alphanumeric keys provide numeric entry Where it is valid to enter alphabetic characters repeated pressing of a numeric key will cause the key to cycle through its associated lower case and then upper case alphabetic characters 6 3 1 4 Special Function Keys Help Help information can be displayed for any M amp C control by holding down the 0 key and pressing the Left arrow key together while the screen containing the M amp C control is displayed This brings up scrollable text that explains the M8C control s function Pressing the O key and Left arrow key together for a second time removes the Help text and reverts the display back to its previous contents Keyboard Lock The keypad can be locked against inadvertent use by holding down the O key and pressing the MAIN key together at the same time Pressing the two keys again at the same time unlocks the keypad LCD Contrast The contrast of the LCD display can be adjusted by holding down the O key and pressing the Up or Down arrow key together at the same time The Up arrow key increases the contrast and the Down arrow key decreases the contrast LCD Backlight The LCD backlight can be dimmed or brightened by holding down the 0 key and pressing the Up or Down arrow key together at the same time 6 94 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Log Alarm Clear The sy
73. timely manner after completing the necessary configuration changes Eee Memories W lsllistsEiey St Download Upload Recall Advanced Reversionary Control Reload time H 0 minutes Configuration Date 15052_Tx_Rx_10MHzRefTest_2 conf 11 Dec 2012 03 28 O LOAD_DEFAULTS conf 12 Apr 2013 20 21 O My_reload_configuration conf 15 Apr 2013 11 55 BMC Test Lcont 25 Feb 2013 22 35 1P999 conf 05 Mar 2013 17 16 Figure 6 29 Edit gt Memories gt Advanced Reversionary Control Screen The procedure for protecting and recovering a remote modem from failure during a configuration change is as follows 1 Prepare in advance a configuration memory that represents a known safe or default configuration for the remote modem This is the configuration that will be 6 75 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook recalled should a manual reconfiguration of the remote modem result in a loss of communications with the modem Ensure that this configuration memory is stored on the remote modem 2 Immediately prior to making any manual change to the remote modem navigate to its Edit gt Memories gt Recall gt Advanced screen and select the radio button corresponding to the configuration memory to be reloaded in the event of a failure during the configuration process 3 Set a reload time This is the period of time in minutes that the operator has to make all the necessary configuration changes to the remote m
74. to the external GPS system Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook FaultText Nees slays To Ter To Sat Other This is as a result of setting the modem to mute terrestrial data on an rx loss of sync where the data Rx fault Terrestrial muted isunmuted when the Eb no threshold is exceeded This due to sync loss is used to counter an excessive number of log entries due to sun outages scintillations causing the demod to continuously go into and out of lock This is a DVB S2 error when valid DVB S2 baseband Rx fault Baseband sync frames are not detected in the DVB S2 satellite frames lost This could be due to corruption due to interference poor signal etc This is a DVB S2 alarm indicating that no valid MPEG2 transport stream packets were detected within the received DVB S2 satellite frame The received DVB S2 satellite frame does not contain a valide baseband frame indicating the the data has become corrupted poor signal interference etc Rx fault No transport traffic Rx fault Baseband CRC error Rx fault RS de interleaver unable to sync to decoded data Check RS settings Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 11 4 Receive Warnings FaultText Notes Relays ToTer ToSat Other Rx warning Doppler buffer Buffer size should not exceed 80ms when data rate max limited Rx data rate exceeds 42Mbps above 42Mbps H Rx warning The minimum ae Ch
75. to which streams Streams can be classified using one of the following methods e The source and or the destination address in the IP packet as well as the port number of the TCP or UDP header in the packet Any or all of these can be used in any combination at the same time e The Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP value in the IP packet header e The 3 bit Priority Code Point field of an IEEE 802 1q VLAN tag also referred to as an IEEE 802 1p Priority Tag e The 3 bit EXP field in an MPLS header e The VLAN ID in a IEEE 802 1q VLAN tag e The PID value in an MPEG2 transport stream packet The key classifiers are described in the following sections These can be selected using the Quality of service scheme dropdown control on the web user interface The result is that each incoming packet is assigned to one of a number of QoS Classes Data will be classified as belonging to the first class in the list for which a match is found starting from the top If no match is found then the packet is assigned a default class that corresponds to a priority level of 0 The default data stream gets a BIR value of the maximum transmit data rate of the modem 7 24 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 9 4 1 IP Address It is possible to classify a data stream based on either the source and or the destination address in the IP packet as well as the port number of the TCP or UDP header in the packet Each address has
76. traps and physical contact relays Automated 24x7 interference detection is therefore provided without the need for an operator to be present LinkGuard detects various forms of interference including tonal interferers such as CW radars Wi MAX jammers and other modulated carriers including adjacent interfering carriers If there is more than one source of interference then it will detect and display all of them When Paired Carrier is being used where two carriers are deliberately superimposed on top of each other then LinkGuard is capable of detecting and displaying any interference under both of the carriers For existing links even ones that do not use Paradise modems a LinkGuard capable modem can be set up to receive the same Rx signal in order to simply monitor the link for interference so long as it can lock to the carrier This is a useful and convenient way of quickly confirming suspected cases of interference while keeping the service running Note that even when the level of interference is severe enough to prevent the demodulator from locking the spectrum graph will continue to show the interference along with the wanted signal although it will not be able to differentiate between them at this point and will show a single composite spectrum LinkGuard does not necessarily replace other interference detection equipment but it does provide a useful new first line of defense It works with all carriers including D
77. use of different spectral roll off factors The carrier does not contain any useful information below the 3dB point There are various definitions of occupied and allocated bandwidth and therefore the 30dB point is used in order to provide an unambiguous reference point When determining the bandwidth of the carrier various cut off points are used by satellite operators with 30dB being the worst case Satellite operators will also add a guard band that further increases the overall bandwidth requirements 6 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 1 1 Status Traffic The Traffic section of the Status page is continually updated with the following information Transmit path status When there is no transmit path fault then the message Tx OK since HH MM SS on DD MM YY is displayed where HH indicates hours MM indicates minutes SS indicates seconds DD indicates the day of the month MM indicates the month of the year and YY indicates the year When a transmit path fault exists then a fault message is displayed instead that indicates the nature of the fault Receive path status When there is no receive path fault then the message Rx OK since HH MM SS on DD MM YY is displayed where the time and date format is as above When a receive path fault exists then a fault message is displayed instead that indicates the nature of the fault Transmit carrier status This disp
78. 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever H has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal If you require the older 34 pin Winchester connector then an adaptor lead is required please contact the factory for details 9 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RTS or Device DTE Ready In line DTR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RTS by selecting Edit gt Tx gt Carrier and selecting RTS enabled ElA 530 Interface in RS232 Mode The ElA 530 interface is used in RS2322 mode a
79. 2 SmartLink If DVB S2 is required but no SCPC features are required then as well as selecting SmartLink the Tx or Rx service should be set to Closed network as this does not add any extra framing to that provided by DVB S2 DVB S2 is provided as a Tx Rx service option whereas SmartLink is provided as an SCPC FEC option once an SCPC service has been selected Currently the only terrestrial interface that is interoperable with other vendors equipment when running a pure DVB S2 service is the IP interface IP is supported on the base modem when in SCPC and SmartLink modes but requires the P3714 IP Traffic card option when using a DVB S2 service 7 35 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook then the Closed Network service should be selected along with the SmartLink FEC option This will provide a DVB S2 service with no additional SCPC framing overhead DVB S2 with IP is supported directly from the Tx and Rx service menu options f If a DVB S2 only service is required for an interface other than IP Once DVB S2 or SmartLink has been enabled various other configuration menu options become available including choice of modulation and FEC rate as well as DVB S2 FEC frame size choice and DVB S2 pilots DVB S2 pilots introduce a regular burst of unmodulated carrier that helps the demodulator lock onto the signal in poor signal to noise conditions at a cost of increased overheads of around 2 4 7 36 Q Flex Satellite
80. 32k in V1 32kbps is provided in V1 with V2 either being omitted or being replaced with Aux data as determined by the DR Aux mode setting When set to 2x32k in V1 V2 the normal full 96kbps of IDR overhead is used including two audio ESC channels encoded as 32kbps ADPCM as well as the standard 32kbps for FAS backward alarms and an 8kbps synchronous ESC channel IDR Aux data This controls the Aux channel in IDR mode It allocates Aux data in place of one or both of the IDR voice channels if these are not used or can be used to reduce the 96kbps overhead to 64kbps or 32kbps When set to Off no Aux data is placed in the overhead When set to 32K 32kbps of Aux data replaces the data in IDR audio ESC channel V2 this requires the DR audio mode setting to be 2x16k in V1 or 1x32k in V1 When set to 64K 64kbps of Aux data replaces the data in IDR audio ESC channels V1 and V2 this requires the DR audio mode to be set to Off ESC level ch1 ch2 These can be set in the range O to 38dB They set the input output levels for the IDR audio ESC channels The two channels can be configured independently Backward alarm mode This controls routing of multiple backward alarms in IDR mode When internally linked from Rx Fail to BA1 or BA1 4 these alarms respond similarly to the normal single backward alarm The options are to set o Backward alarm 1 4 external o Backward alarm 1 internal backward alarm 2 4 external o Backward alarm 1 internal backward a
81. 4 5 6 8 9 9 10 16APSK 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 32APSK 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 Table 6 71 Tx Modulation and FEC Code Rates 6 2 3 15 Stream Tx FEC Code Rate Each stream can use any of the supported DVB S2 FEC code rates listed in Table 6 58 In receive the FEC code rate is detected automatically 6 2 3 16 Stream Tx Pilot Tones Pilots are an On Off control that controls whether DVB S2 pilots which are unmodulated symbols are injected into the carrier on a regular basis in order to help the demodulator lock onto the carrier The pilots are 36 symbols long and are injected every 1440 symbols representing an additional overhead of around 2 4 6 2 3 17 DVB S2 Tx Frame Size Short This represents a frame size of 16 200 bits per frame Normal This represents a frame size of 64 800 bits per frame This is more bandwidth efficient than short frames but has four times the latency As a guideline short frames have a latency of around 25ms at 1Mbps whereas the latency for normal frames is around 100ms at 1Mbps The latency will halve as data rate doubles Table 6 72 DVB S2 Tx Rx Frame Size 6 2 3 18 Tx Rx Symbol Rate The calculated transmit and receive symbol rates aggregated for all streams are displayed in order to allow the user to verify that the streams have been set up correctly 6 2 4 Edit gt IP gt 00S Screen Traffic shaping is described in Section 7 8 9 6 65 Q Flex Satellite Mod
82. 4 160 DVB S2 16APSK 9 10 356 8 160 FASTLINK LOW LATENCY LDPC SEE SEPARATE DATASHEET NOTE Maximum data rate for TPC is 60Mbps for FastLink is 100Mbps for DVB S2 is 132Mbps and for DVB S2X is 160Mbps 12 11 12 13 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Parameter Traffic Log Specifications Modem Capacity Over 6000 entries 12 14 Entry Format Parameter Fault message with time and date stamp Separate entry when fault clears changes Common Specifications Modem Loop backs Interface Loop Local and Remote Internal IF loopback local automatically matching Rx IF frequency to Tx Test Modes Transmit CW Pure Carrier Transmit Alternate 1 0 Pattern Alarm Relays 4 Independent Change Over Contacts Unit Fault Rx Traffic Fault Tx Traffic Fault Deferred Alarm backward alarm BER or Eb No below user set threshold Embedded Software Revised embedded software may be downloaded into non volatile memory via Ethernet port or USB with modem remaining in equipment rack Configuration Memories 100 configurations can be stored and recalled from the front panel or remote M amp C Memories can be labeled with text string to aid identification User Interface Clear and intuitive operator interface with plain English dialogue other languages supported Graphic display backlit high contrast wide angle LCD 17 key t
83. 44 6 2 1 Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Reset Screen oocccccconccnccononcnonononcnonononcnnnnananons 6 44 6 2 1 Edit gt Unit gt Carrier ID Gcreen cee ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeueueeseaeeeaaueeneneaes 6 45 6 2 1 1 Carrier ID Global Unique Identifier AAA 6 46 6 2 1 2 Carrier ID Latitude and Longitude AAA 6 46 6 2 1 3 Carrier ID Custom Message and Telephone Number 6 46 EE DEEN ed IL D e O A O Na o Dd e ad TE 6 46 6 22 e E E EE 6 46 62222 A enge Ee de eeh 6 47 6 22 27 Bridg WAR nc na 6 49 6 2 2 3 TOP Accra da 6 49 6 2 2 4 Round trip Satellite Deia 6 50 6 2 2 5 Header COMmpressiON dG dans wate e tai 6 50 6 2 2 6 Payload Compression seccatid ss 6 50 6 22 7 AGM Mode ski tai 6 50 6 2 2 8 ACM Rain Fade MardlMiaoniiicas ac 6 52 6 2 2 9 M amp C IP Address Subnet Mask 8 Modem IP Gateway 6 52 6 2 2 10 Traffic Satelite IP Addresses and Subnet Maske 6 53 6 2 2 11 IP Encapsulation Type oooccccccccccnnncononcncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnrnnnnnnn nn nccnnnnns 6 54 6 2 2 12 Encaps lation E ee 6 54 6 2 2 13 MPE MAC Address occccooccccnccccncccnnncccnnanononcnnnnanonnncnnnncncnnnncnnnancnncncnns 6 55 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 14 Weighted EE EE 6 55 6 2 2 15 IPV4 IPV6 Mode iii mirrin innear heraa in ea fiiere a iaaa 6 56 6 2 2 16 M amp C and IP Traffic Ethernet Speed Duplex ooocoooccococccccccccccacccannccnos 6 56 6 2 2 17 BIhernet Mt e e EE E 6 58 6 2 3 Edit gt IP gt AdVanced Gcreen 6 5
84. 5 4 200 GHz This presets the LNB LO frequency to 5150MHz Ku 10 95 11 45 GHz This presets the LNB LO frequency to 10000MHz Ku 11 2 11 7 GHz This presets the LNB LO frequency to 10250MHz Ku 11 7 12 2 GHz This presets the LNB LO frequency to 10750MHz Ku 12 25 12 75 GHz This presets the LNB LO frequency to 11300MHz Table 6 31 LNB Type 6 2 4 8 LNB LO Frequency Range 99 999GHZ to 99 999GHz step size 0 0000001 GHz Description This is the local oscillator frequency of the LNB Table 6 32 LNB LO Frequency 6 2 4 9 DC to LNB This is an On Off control used to enable and disable the DC power supply from the modem to the LNB 6 2 4 10 10MHz to LNB This is an On Off control used to enable and disable the 10MHz reference from the modem to the LNB 6 2 4 11 Mute LNB Services in Standby This is an On Off control used to enable and disable the transfer of LNB DC and 10MHz services from a failed modem to a backup modem in a 1 1 or 1 N redundancy system Setting the checkbox causes the services to switch over from the online modem to the backup modem on a failure 6 2 5 Edit gt Unit Screen The Edit gt Unit screen contains the following tab menu options 6 27 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e M amp C This controls remote M amp C settings including serial control settings and user passwords Alarms This controls alarm thresholds and act
85. 5 1 5 2 Standard Fit Hardware ax A A iia 5 2 521 IE band Opera EE 5 2 5 22 Ethernet Operator 5 2 5 3 Hardware Opio sata ins 5 3 5 3 1 Terrestrial Interface Option CardS ooomoocccccnnnnncccnnnoncccncnnnnnnnnnnnannncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 5 3 5 3 1 1 4 port Gigabit Ethernet Switch eene 5 3 31 27 703 OPlU0N Can uniera coa cial 5 3 3 3 1 3 ElA 530 Option Card sosa ica danita todo ein nas Rees 5 3 5 3 1 4 STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet Option Card 5 3 531 5 IDR Option Cat eene greus EEN 5 4 53 16 LVDS Option Cara io dl 5 4 5 3 1 7 HSSI Option Lair ai A AAA 5 4 5 3 1 8 Quad E1 Option Cal ees egeeueceeen Ee eEO EEN enee 5 4 5 3 2 HEEL Cards susi Eeer 5 5 5 3 3 BUG Power Supply OplUOAS iia 5 5 5 4 Software EE 5 5 55 PRON PANG ee dree dee a tered aa ee 5 9 o NEE elle 5 9 55 2 EGD Display Ci 5 9 E DE A deare A Sau erga raat teeta eee cence 5 10 5 6 Rear EE EE 5 10 Chapter6 User Interfaces cccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnsseeeeneeeeeeeesensseneneeeeeneess 6 1 6 1 Y sa cea tat ag cet ce a ely he tater E seat ee es 6 1 A r E aee E e ETATE PETETA ETES 6 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 1 2 takeaway Mode cta io 6 1 6 2 WebUser interface 22 nani ena a dani lentil de NEE e 6 2 6 2 1 Ee IR 6 2 Di SAUS O ad 6 3 CN BEE EE 6 5 6 2 2 2 Status DeMOdulator oooccccnccccnncncnncccnnncncnancnonanannnanonnncnnnnannnnancnnnaninanins 6 6 6 2 2 3 Status Paired Carter 6 7 0 224 Status AGM ic
86. 8 6 2 3 1 Terrestrial Berg snasda aaa vets each vacteavvedeceutecteuss 6 59 6 2 3 2 Satellite Buffer SiZ annasan a a N 6 60 6 2 3 3 Ethernet Address Leammg AEN 6 60 6 2 3 4 Point to multipoint Mode ccoo ria 6 61 6 2 9 5 VLAN EMO Mail is E Ns A 6 61 6 2 3 6 Null Packet Insertion cece a aa a ae aE O ANOETA 6 62 6 2 3 7 PCR Restamping cc ces EE 6 62 6 2 3 8 MPEG Over IP Typ coat e 6 63 6 2 3 9 Destination Address and Destination Port 6 63 6 2 3 10 Local Multicast Address and Local Port 6 63 6 2 3 11 Stream Tx Rx Terrestrial Interlace cece cece eeeeceseeeseeeeeeseeeeenes 6 64 6 2 3 12 Stream Tx Rx ldentifier ooooonncnnncccnocccnnnccnnncnonancnonaccnonacano nano nnnicnno 6 64 6 2 3 13 Stream Tx Data Hate ccccccecsceeceseeeeeseeeeeeeeseseeeeueeeeseaeeenes 6 64 6 2 3 14 Stream Tx Modulation oocccccccccnncccnnccnnnacinnnanonononona nano nacanonaninanicnno 6 64 6 2 3 15 Stream Tx FEC Code Hate 6 65 6 2 3 16 Stream Tx Plet TOMES Ruina din 6 65 6 2 3 17 DVB S2 TX FRAME EE 6 65 EE NK deg lee 6 65 6 24 Edit gt IP gt Q0S Cr EE 6 65 6 2 5 Edit gt IP gt Static Routes Screen oocccccconncncncnoncnnnnnnaconononanoncnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnananons 6 66 6 2 6 Edit gt IP gt Header Compression Routes Green 6 67 6 2 7 Edit gt Paired Carrier Gcreen 6 68 6 2 7 1 Paired Carrier Enable eenei ea a a a a a ia a aa ai 6 68 6 2 7 2 WROUNG WIP DELAY cr Ee a del ate ete rata 6 71 6 2 7 3 Ee EE 6 72 6 2 7 4 Earth Station Longitud
87. B Shield Gnd aeu HE ES sl HA SE Pins 1 and 5 are both grounded on the modem ie Shield and Ground are interchangeable Shield Gnd Shield Gnd TXA Eed SANA We Weg SlaveB fommodem 5 We WE Kegel WEEN A 1 N 1 1 Interface Connector type 9 pin D male 10 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 1 n CONNECTOR Line In Serial In A RS232 485 A 5 Serial In B RS232 485 Serial Out A RS485 Serial Out B RS485 Serial In Out This is an uncommitted and currently unused RS232 or RS485 serial port Line In Out amp Fail In Out The 1 1 redundancy cable is wired as follows Modem 1 Modem 2 Signal Name Pin 1 Pin 1 Circuit ground screen Pin 2 Pin 3 On Line signal 2 1 Pin 3 Pin 2 On Line signal 1 2 Pin 6 Pin 7 Fail signal 2 1 Pin 7 Pin 6 Fail signal 1 2 The cable must be of the shielded variety and should be kept as short as practical A standard 1 1 lead part number P1391 is available from Teledyne Paradise Datacom The lead is 10cm long and is designed for use when two modems are mounted vertically adjacent to each other in the rack 10 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Alarms and AGC Connector Connector type 15 pin D male ALARMS CONNECTOR 2 Fault Relay Common 1 12 4 Prompt Unit fault N O 4 3 Prompt Tx Traffic fault prompt N O Buffered direct AGC voltage This may be used
88. BS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC overhead maintains the identity of individual Drop Insert timeslots for N 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 and 30 Timeslot Selection Bearer Backup Timeslot ID Maintenance 12 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 8 Extended Drop and Insert Option Specifications Parameter Modem Timeslot Re Ordering Selected timeslots may be independently re ordered on both Tx and Rx paths Multi Destinational Working All or only a subset of the received data may be inserted into the terrestrial bearer on the receive path for multi Destinational working Timeslot ID Maintenance The IBS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC is extended to maintain the identity of individual timeslots for all values of N from 1 to 31 Signalling Both Channel Associated Signalling CAS and Robbed Bit Signalling RBS are fully supported For G 732 Drop Insert CAS signalling is extracted from terrestrial TS16 and carried over the satellite in IBS SMS TS16 and TS48 before re inserting into the distant terrestrial TS16 For RBS the IBS or Closed Net Plus ESC overheads maintain the identity of the in band signalling and it is re inserted into the terrestrial multi frame in the correct positions to maintain the RBS 12 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 9 Advanced ESC and Advanced Aux Option Specifications Parameter
89. For all supported data rates Paired Carrier is subject to a minimum occupied bandwidth of 30kHz and a maximum of 54MHz Paired Carrier 256kbps to 512kbps PCMA Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range Paired Carrier 512kbps to 1 024Mbps PCMB Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range Paired Carrier 1 024Mbps to 2 5Mbps PCMC Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range Table 5 2 Software Activated Features continues over page 5 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Feature nda Description Paired CarrierTM PCMD Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 2 5Mbps to 5Mbps Paired Carrier PCME Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 5Mbps to 10Mbps Paired Carrier PCMF Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 10Mbps to 15Mbps Paired Carrier PCMG Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 15Mbps to 20Mbps Paired Carrier PCMH Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 20Mbps to 25Mbps Paired Carrier PCMI Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 25Mbps to 30Mbps Paired Carrier PCMJ Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 30Mbps to 40Mbps Paired Carrier PCMK Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 40Mbps to 50Mbps
90. IP Address and Fallback Address 6 29 6 2 6 3 RADIUS Shared Gecret ccc ccccccccceececee A aA OEE aaa 6 29 6 2 6 4 RADIUS Authentication Valhdty 6 30 6 2 6 5 RADIUS Server Tmeout 6 31 6 2 6 6 Remote M amp C Interface 6 31 6 2 6 7 Modem ldentity eebe sisal eee ee ts tee 6 33 6 2 7 Edit gt Unit gt M8C gt SNMP Gcreen 6 33 6 2 8 Edit gt Unit gt M8C gt Email Screen oooccnnncccnncccnncnnnnancnnncncnannnnnncnn nano nananinanins 6 34 6 2 9 Edit gt Unit gt M8 C gt HTTPS Screen oooccccnccccncccnnncnnnnancnonanonnncnonancnonacanananinanins 6 37 6 2 10 Edit gt Unit gt Alarms Gcreen nana nonanananacananins 6 38 6 2 10 1 LinkGuard Interference ooocccccccccncccnnncnnnncncnnnccnonancnnncnnnnancnnnancnnanns 6 38 6 2 10 2 Tx Rx AIS Alarm Achon nano n oracion anno na nannno 6 38 6 2 10 3 Local Remote Eb No Alarm Thresbold 6 39 6 2 10 4 Buffer Slip Alarm Thbresbold AAA EEN 6 39 6 2 10 5 BUG DC Current Ala Mie n eant a aaa ea 6 39 6 2 10 6 LNB DC Current Alamm nienke nkiri takenote 6 40 6 2 11 Edit gt Unit gt Station Clock Gcreen 6 40 6 2 11 1 Station Glock SOERENSEN 6 41 6 2 11 2 Station Clock Frequency ANNE 6 41 6 2 11 3 Locking the High Stability Oscillator to the Station Clock 6 42 6 2 12 Edit gt Unit gt SAF Gcreen cc ccccccceccceeeceeeeceeeeeeseeseeuaueeeeaeeeaaueeweeaes 6 42 6 2 13 Edit gt Unit gt Upgrade Gcreen AANEREN 6 43 6 2 14 Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt TiMe Gcreen 6
91. If the Tx modem cannot use a CAS Multiframe to maintain RBS over satellite switch RBS off Rx fault Final BER gt 1E 3 Final BER has exceed 1x10 3 R TA JTC GE Rx fault FEC Decoder Synchronisation has been lost in the FEC decoder TA mae SB synchronization lost Check inner FEC configuration The final customer data after demodulation error Rx fault Insert data is all correction deframing and descrambling is all ones ones AIS indicating This is normally used to indicate an upstream equipment upstream equipment fault fault such as a lack of input clock at the Tx end it is not a modem fault Rx faut pala input eal The modem is set to loop bearer but that bearer is ones AIS indicating e indicating AIS upstream equipment fault Gerd channe DELL Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared MER Rx fault Rx terrestrial 3 ER DPLL unlocked Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared E o Rx fault Insert mux fault on ports 1 to 4 Seer Cae fault EA Rx fault Rx SM sync loss Quad E1 sync loss fault ME F lb Rx fault Physical layer DVB S2 demodulator cannot detect valid DVB S2 M sync lost satellite frames no data detected Consult troubleshooting section of Paired Carrier quick T o Rx fault PCMA unlocked start guide for list of potential causes GPS input to Paired Carrier for calculating the delay to dra EE data satellite has failed Check status of and cable
92. MPEG2 packets On the receive side the MPEG2 packets are encapsulated back into IP packets using IP address and port number information entered by the user When decapsulating and encapsulating MPEG2 packets the modem needs to know whether the IP packets contain just UDP headers or UDP and RTP headers 6 2 3 9 Destination Address and Destination Port Destination When using MPEG2 over IP the IP packet wrapper is discarded in order address to save satellite bandwidth The user entered destination address is therefore used on the receive side in order to recreate a copy of the original IP packet Destination The destination UDP port number is used in a similar way to to the port destination address above when creating a copy of the original IP packet in order to wrapper received MPEG2 packets Table 6 66 Destination Address amp Destination Port 6 2 3 10 Local Multicast Address and Local Port Local When using MPEG2 over IP the modem can listen on a local multicast multicast address in order to detect packets to be sent over satellite address 6 63 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Local port The local port number is used in conjunction with the local multicast address above in order to fully define the address and port number the modem should listen on for incoming multicast packets Table 6 67 Local Multicast Address and Local Port 6 2 3 11 Stream T
93. Memories Advanced EE Static Routes IPv4 Header Compression IPv4 Tx IP Buffers Terrestrial buffer size 0 pkts Satellite buffer size 256 pkts Miscellaneous Ethernet address learning Point to multipoint mode Off v Enable VLAN filtering VLAN ID 0 MPEG2 Transport Stream Null packet insertion On PCR restamping MPEG over IP type UDP Destination address 0 0 0 0 Destination port O Local multicast address 0 0 0 0 Local port 0 DYB 52 YCM Multi streaming TES Rx Stream 1 terrestrial interface Of Stream 1 terrestrial interface Off H Stream 1 identifier H Stream 1 identifier 1 Stream 1 data rate 0 000000 Mbps Stream 1 modulation QPS Stream 1 FEC code rate 1 2 Stream 1 pilot tones Stream 1 FEC frame size Stream 2 terrestrial interface Off Stream 2 terrestrial interface OF Stream 2 identifier D Stream 2 identifier 2 Stream 2 data rate 0 000000 Mbps Stream 2 modulation OPS Stream 2 FEC code rate 1 2 Stream 2 pilot tones Stream 2 FEC frame size Short Tx symbol rate 140 000000 Msps Rx symbol rate 40 000000 Msps Figure 6 23 Edit gt IP gt Advanced Screen 6 2 3 1 Terrestrial Buffer Size The terrestrial buffer is used to buffer IP packets coming into the IP terrestrial ports for transmission over satellite Satellite delay and the quality of the service in general can be controlled by the size of this buffer in conjunction with setting the size of the satellit
94. Mode In this mode the M amp C Ethernet port and IP Traffic port have dedicated addresses and must be on separate subnets All packets on both ports will be accelerated and passed over satellite as required The modem gateway is applied to either the M amp C subnet or IP Traffic subnet as specified by the user 6 49 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 4 Round trip Satellite Delay Range Oms to 9999ms step size 1ms Description This sets a satellite round trip delay that is used in conjunction with TCP acceleration lt controls the size of the modem s internal packet buffer to match the bandwidth delay product for the link i e the link s data capacity multiplied by the end to end delay This helps to maintain the throughput at its maximum level when TCP acceleration is on Table 6 52 Round trip Satellite Delay 6 2 2 5 Header Compression This is an On Off control that controls header compression IP UDP and RTP header compression is supported in accordance with the Robust Header Compression ROHC standard RFC 3095 profiles 2 and 3 ROHC typically reduces the 40 bytes of IP UDP and RTP header which is typically used with Voice over IP data down to between 1 and 3 bytes Ethernet header compression is also supported in addition and this reduces 14 bytes of Ethernet frame down to typically 1 byte Overall savings from compression from both types of compression e g for a G 729 voic
95. Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 10 Paired CarrierTM Paired Carrier can be used to reduce satellite bandwidth requirements by up to 50 by overlapping transmit and receive carriers in the same space segment lt uses ViaSat s patented PCMA technology Paired Carter is now mature fourth generation giving performance second to none Adaptive self interference cancellation is used to subtract the unit s transmitted signal from the composiste received signal leaving just the desired signal This is depicted in Figure 7 15 uplink downlink signal signal Typical satellite transmission with separate frequency slots for the uplink and downlink SSS SSS W Hz W Hz frequency uplink amp downlink signals Using Paired Carrier with uplink and downlink carriers overlaid 50 can be saved on the cost of space segment SS W Hz frequency Figure 7 15 Frequency Re use by Overlaying Carriers The Paired Carrier processing in the modem to cancel the unwanted signal in the composite received signal to be left with only the desired signal is shown in the diagram overleaf The signal cancellation algorithm estimates and compensates for gain frequency phase and delay in matching the unwanted component of the composite Rx signal with a delay buffered version of its own transmission 7 37 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Quantum Satellite Modern Digital Analogue Tx OUT Modulator Mod
96. NC connectors For balanced operation T1 line impedance is 1000 E1 line impedance is 1200 and T2 line impedance is 1100 Unbalanced E1 T2 E3 and T3 line impedance is 75Q Line impedance is software selectable ESC and Aux Connector IDR Option Card When fitted the IDR option card provides access to e Four backward alarm form C relay outputs and four backward alarm inputs together with an Rx summary alarm signal e Two audio ESC ports with 4 wire 6000 impedance and input range 7dBm to 16dBm for use in IDR operation These ports may also be used in IBS services to generate a 64kbps IBS carrier comprised of two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels or a 128kbps IBS carrier comprised of 64kbps data from the main data interface of the modem plus two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels e An RS232 RS422 RS485 port for synchronous and asynchronous ESC traffic This port replaces the shared ESC Aux function on the rear panel Async ESC connector It provides an 8kbps synchronous IDR ESC channel If the Async ESC feature is available then this port provides an asynchronous 8kbps channel and a high rate asynchronous ESC in IBS and Closed Network ESC services e An RS232 RS422 port for synchronous and asynchronous Aux traffic This port replaces the shared ESC Aux function on the rear panel Async ESC connector The port provides a 32kbps or 64kbps IDR overhead channel in place of one or both of the IDR 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channels In IBS this port may
97. Paired Carrier PCML Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 50Mbps to 60Mbps Paired CarrierTM PCMM Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 60Mbps to 80Mbps Paired Carrier PCMN Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 80Mbps to 100Mbps Paired Carrier PCMO Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range 100Mbps to 160Mbps Optimised spectral roll ROFF Enables 5 10 and 15 spectral roll off options off Wideband WRF Extends L band operation upper frequency limit from 2050MHz to 2150MHz DVB CID CID DVB Carrier ID Tx carrier identification per ETSI 103 129 Packet PTP Supports IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol Version Synchronisation 2 IBS IBS Enables IBS service to IESS 309 with low rate Intelsat ESC to IESS 403 and high rate IBS ESC Legacy FECs IRS Enables Sequential FEC limited to 2 048Mbps TCM SEQ 8PSK 2 3 to IESS 310 Viterbi BPSK QPSK OQPSK TCM FEC rates 1 2 3 4 amp 7 8 Intelsat Reed Solomon outer TPL codec TPH LinkGuard LG LinkGuard signal under carrier interference detection Table 5 2 Software Activated Features 5 8 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 5 5 Front Panel Satellite Modem f IS DB Figure 5 1 Modem Front Panel The front panel shown in Figure 5 1 comprises e Light Emitting Diodes LEDs that provide basic modem status e A Liquid Crystal Display LCD that acts as the local us
98. RxClock RT ModemRx Data Interface Rx Buffer DDS A Station clock Data from decoder deframer Figure 7 6 Station Clock Rx Clock Mode 7 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 1 2 4 Internal Clock When Internal is selected the modem s Rx timing is phase locked to the modem s internal clock but is run at the Rx data rate frequency The Rx Doppler buffer is enabled The clock and data appear on Receive Timing RT and Receive Data RD respectively RxData RxClock RT AA no Modem Rx Data Interface Rx Buffer DDS Data from decoder deframer Ref TCXO Figure 7 7 Internal Rx Clock Mode 7 1 3 Guidelines for Clocking Configuration The following needs to be ascertained e Incoming Rx carrier o Is your Tx clock looped back at the remote end o If not what is the accuracy of the clock transmitted by the remote end e Outgoing Tx carrier o Is the incoming Rx clock being looped Tx clock Rx or clock looped by the equipment or via cables o If not what is the accuracy of the Tx clock The various Tx and Rx clocking modes of the modem are described in the following sections 7 1 3 1 Clock Loop at One End The end with the clock loop requires the buffer to be disabled i e the Rx clock to be set to Satellite lf there is either a cabled clock loop or the equipment loops the Rx clock back to the modem Tx input the
99. TELEDYNE PARADISE DATACOM A Teledyne Technologies Company HAB Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Issue 3 0 55 30 January 2015 Gi Registered UKAS i MANAGEMENT Quality SYSTEMS Management ISO 9001 CE 2015 EN 55022 Class B EN 55024 EN 60950 Teledyne Paradise Datacom Ltd Teledyne Paradise Datacom LLC 2 amp 3 The Matchyns Rivenhall End 328 Innovation Blvd Witham Essex CM8 3HA England State College PA 16803 U S A Tel 44 0 1376 515636 Tel 1 814 238 3450 Fax 44 0 1376 533764 Fax 1 814 238 3829 http www paradisedata com Copyright O 2013 2015 Teledyne Paradise Datacom Ltd All rights reserved Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Table of Contents Chapter Welcome cian 1 1 Chapter 2 About This Handbook cccceccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeees 2 1 2 1 CONV E 2 1 2 2 MURAI MAN KS st e a p a 2 1 2 3 RT TEE 2 1 Chapter3 Safety and Compliance Information oooccccccconnnnnncnccnnnnononnnananacncnnnnnnnos 3 1 3 1 Safety COMPIEANOS E 3 1 3 2 Environmental CompllanGes caidas 3 2 3 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Compliance cocccccccccnncononcccncninonananananonon 3 3 Ghapter 4 Installation ees eee eee 4 1 4 1 ele ele E 4 1 4 2 LING GUDDIY A EE 4 1 4 3 e O te odode eweueutels edel dees 4 1 4 4 Getting Statied EE 4 2 Chapter 5 Jottrog Dee ii aa cdc eet ee tele Bi 5 1 5 1 KEEN La A ee
100. Temperature Class Current level AUPC Remote Eb No Power offset Link status 1 FOR N Switch status MISC Eb No Es No Rx power level Figure 6 51 Front panel Status Menus 6 97 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 3 Edit Menu EDIT All Tx Rx Unit IP PEMA Memories Redundancy ALL 411 common Edit controls TA SEE SEPARATE MENU TREE RA SEE SEPARATE MENU TREE UNIT SEE SEPARATE MENU TREE Node IP mode Bridge M amp C port TCP acceleration Satellite round trip delay Header compression Payload compression ACM mode Encryption Encryption seed IP Mddresses Remote control port IP address Remote control port IP subnet Modem gateway IP traffic port IP address IP traffic port IP subnet Satellite traffic port IP address 44or 1 Satellite port IP subnet Switchover Misc Switch to standby DVB S2 IP encapsulation type Switch to maintenance MPE air MAC address Switch to service OVB S2 PID filter Operation Weiahted DoS Receive fail switchover IPAWIP 6 address selection Transmit fail switchover PCMA Paired Carrier on off 44 Pee mes A i or N Method selection for round trip delay calculation Redundancy switch R 485 address Modem latituded ongitude Switch to standby Satellite longitude Learn modem configurations Minimum maximum round trip delays Maintenance Switch modem to maintenance MEMORIES Store Switch modem to in service Recall Switchover offfon Erase Swi
101. VB S2 S2X 7 7 FastLink Low latency LDPC FEC design is a trade off between good BER performance and low latency TPC has low latency but BER performance can be 1dB or more worse than conventional LDPC For example TPC 8QAM 3 at 5e 8 BER has an Eb No of 6 4dB compared to LDPC at 5 5dB Conventional LDPC latency can be many times that of TPC For example LDPC 16QAM at 64kbps has a latency of 395ms compared to TPC latency of 47ms which is a factor of over eight different With satellite delay in addition LDPC can exhibit over Y second one way delay for very low data rates Low latency LDPC FECs are becoming available that provide comparable BER performance to LDPC with latency nearer to TPC FastLink low latency LDPC from Paradise does precisely this FastLink also offers an extensive range of modulations ranging from BPSK to 64QAM including both 8PSK and 8QAM 16APSK and 16QAM and 32APSK One of the key advantages of FastLink is its flexibility As mentioned FECs offer a trade off between BER performance and latency While the default settings for FastLink achieve this balance two other modes are also available The first mode optimises performance for particularly low latency at the cost of a slight increase in Eb No required to achieve a specific BER The second mode optimises BER performance and is suitable when latency is not an issue e g when higher data rates are being used This flexibility 7 15 Q Flex Satelli
102. actile full keyboard Remote Monitor and Control For multi drop applications RS485 interface For direct to PC applications RS232 interface front panel selectable M amp C port may be directly internally linked to ESC port for over the satellite M amp C without cabling Ethernet 10 100 1000 BaseT via RJ45 embedded Web server SNMP agent V1 V2c V3 Redundancy Features 1 1 redundancy controller built in Y cables passively split data maintaining impedances IF inputs outputs are passively split combined outside the units Off line unit tri states data outputs and mutes Tx carrier 1 N up to 16 supported for many interface types Monitor 0 to 10V analogue output Signal level Eb No or Rx offset frequency on Alarms amp AGC connector Mechanical 1U chassis 410mm deep excluding front panel handles and rear panel connectors and fans Weight 3 5 Kg Power Supply 90 to 264VAC 1A 100V 0 5A 240V 47 to 63Hz Fused IEC connector live and neutral fused 24V and 48V DC options 12 12 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Safety EN60950 1 EMC EN55022 Class B Emissions EN55082 Part 1 Immunity Environmental Operating Temperature Range 0 to 50 C Mains data 12 15 Internet Traffic Parameter AC Mains inrush surge current at power up 25A 250V Modem uses 3 15A slow blow fuses in all cases Maximum power consu
103. adio Disturbance Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement e Immunity EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement e Federal Communications Commission FCC Federal Code of Regulation Part 15 Subpart B All D type connectors must have grounding fingers on the plug shell to guarantee continuous shielding The back shells must comply with the requirements of VDE 0871 and FCC 20708 providing at least 40dB of attenuation from 30MHz to 1GHz A good quality cable with a continuous outer shield correctly grounded must be used Connections to transmit and receive IF interfaces must be made with double screened coaxial cable for example RG223 U The modem Ethernet ports should not be connected directly to outdoor Ethernet cables that may be be subject to transient overvoltages due to atmospheric discharges and faults in the power distribution network Instead the modem should be connected via an Ethernet switch or router to provide isolation from overvoltages as recommended in clause 6 of EN 60950 1 3 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter A Installation 4 1 Unpacking Prior to unpacking inspect the exterior of the shipping container for any sign of damage during transit If damage is evident contact the carrier immediately and submit a damage report Carefully unpack all items taking ca
104. advertise 10Mbps full duplex as the only option available 100M half duplex The modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings but as part of the negotiation will advertise 100Mbps half duplex as the only option available 100M full duplex The modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings but as part of the negotiation will advertise 100Mbps full duplex as the only option available 1000M half duplex The modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings but as part of the negotiation will advertise 1000Mbps half duplex as the only option available 1000M full duplex The modem will auto negotiate the Ethernet speed and duplex settings but as part of the negotiation will advertise 1000Mbps full duplex as the only option available 10M half duplex The modem s Ethernet interfaces will be fixed to 10Mbps half fixed duplex operation 10M full duplex The modem s Ethernet interfaces will be fixed to 10Mbps full fixed duplex operation 100M half duplex The modem s Ethernet interfaces will be fixed to 100Mbps half fixed duplex operation 100M full duplex The modem s Ethernet interfaces will be fixed to 100Mbps full fixed duplex operation 1000M half duplex The modem s Ethernet interfaces will be fixed to 1000Mbps half fixed duplex operation 1000M full duplex The modem s Ethernet interfaces will be fixed to 1000Mbps full fixed duplex operation
105. ail outputs to the appropriate other BA inputs Leave unused inputs floating 10 9 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook In IDR modes these are used for the four standard IDR backward alarms In IBS modes BA 1 indicates the normal single IBS backward alarm status mirrored by the unit deferred alarm For multidestinational IBS carriers it is possible to operate the modem in IBS mode but use four separate backward alarms as per IDR 10 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 11 Fault Messages The following table lists all of the modem faults along with a description of what the fault means lt also describes relevant checks the operator might make to try to eliminate the fault condition Note that the text shown in the table will be displayed in full on the web user interface and in the system log but may appear in an abbreviated format on the front panel LCD display due to space considerations The acronyms used to define the actions taken on each fault occurring are as follows Actions Relays U Prompt unit fault relay T Prompt traffic fault relay D Deferred alarm relay Actions To Terrestrial TA AIS in selected timeslot if the Insert MUX is active or AIS over all data if not in Insert mode If Insert mode is active and the user control thin route spoofing is on then AIS is forced over the whole PCM bearer not just the selected timeslots to spoof full bearer connec
106. ailable for fitting a terrestrial interface card Any of the following option cards may be fitted in these interface positions note that fitting duplicate cards of the same type is not supported 5 3 1 1 4 port Gigabit Ethernet Switch The 4 port Gigabit Ethernet switch card part number P3718 extends the base modem Ethernet traffic port with three further RJ45 Ethernet ports creating a 4 port switch 5 3 1 2 G 703 Option Card The G 703 option card part number P3722 provides support for G 703 E1 T1 E2 T2 and E3 T3 traffic rates Unbalanced G 703 is provided on two BNC 750 sockets and balanced G 703 is provided on two RJ45 sockets The following software features are included as standard with the G 703 option card e G 703 clock extension providing a high stability reference clock over satellite alternative to GPS In this mode the G 703 card is used purely as a high stability clock generator for some other traffic source such as serial data e Timeslot Drop amp Insert feature allowing fractional E1 T1 services 5 3 1 3 EIA 530 Option Card The ElA 530 option card part number P3720 provides selectable RS422 X 21 V 35 and RS232 operation up to 10Mbps via a 25 way D type female connector 5 3 1 4 STM 1 0C 3 Optical Ethernet Option Card The STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet option card part number P3723 provides selectable STM 1 OC 3 and optical Ethernet operation up to 160Mbps An open standard SFP cage is fitted that can be u
107. al type Aux interface electrical type ESC level ch1 ESC level ch2 Backward alarm control IDR IDR 8k ESC mode ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type IDR ESC audio encoding IDR overhead assignment to Aux channel Aux interface electrical type ESC level ch1 ESC level ch2 Backward alarm control Figure 6 53 Front panel Edit gt Tx Menus 6 99 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 3 2 Edit gt Rx Menu SERVICE Tx service DATA RATE Data rate SYMBOL RATE Symbol rate BASEBAND Framing Timeslots Overhead CLOCKS Rx path clock source Ra A Buffer size Service Data rate Symbol rate Baseband Clocks Manual buffer centre MODCOD FEC type Modcod Modulation Carrier Code rate LNB D VB8 S2 frame size Rx Tx DVD 52 pilots FastLink optimisation mode RS mode CARRIER IF L band selection Frequency Roll off Inversion Sweep width LNB LNB type LO frequency DC out on off 10MHz on off 1 1 services R amp TA Centre buffer after failure recovery FRAMING Baseband mode 2048k data format G 732 CAS signaling Insert bearer format Generate bearer TIMESLOTS Number of timeslots used Timeslot selection Timeslot ID maintenance over satellite Partial insert Partial insert timeslot selection OVERHESD Closed ESC ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC inte
108. allation and Operating Handbook Redundancy Save Configuration Name for new configuration Stored Configuration Configuration File Size Date Select 15052_Tx_Rx_10MHzRefTest_2 1693 bytes 11 Der 2012 03 28 FTwork 1747 bytes O1Jan 1970 01 02 Functional_Test 637 bytes 24Dec2012 17 36 Figure 6 31 Edit gt Memories gt Store Screen 6 2 8 4 Edit gt Memories gt Download Screen The Edit gt Memories gt Download screen shown in Figure 6 32 displays all of the configuration memories that are stored on the modem and can be used to download one or all of the configurations from the modem to the user s browser device such as a PC X Rx GENERAN Memories W lle Download MUJER Download Stored Configuration Download Selected Configuration Download All Configuration File Size Date 15052_Tx_Rx_10MHzRefTest_2 conf 1693 bytes 11 Dec 2012 03 28 O FTwork conf 1747 bytes O1Jan 1970 00 02 O Functional_Test conf 637 bytes 24 Dec 2012 17 36 O Figure 6 32 Edit gt Memories gt Download Screen 6 2 8 5 Edit gt Memories gt Upload Screen The Edit gt Memories gt Upload screen shown in Figure 6 33 allows the user to browse to a location on their browser device where they have a configuration memory that they want to upload to the modem After selecting the file selecting the Upload Saved Configuration button causes the configuration to be transferred to the modem 6 77 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation an
109. am Rx frequency offset Hz Rx Doppler buffer usage 48 0 y Rx Doppler buffer overflows a Rx Doppler buffer underflows 0 Reset baseband counts Rx DYBS2 baseband 0 frames Rx DVBS2 baseband 0 errors Paired Carrier Paired Carrier lock Paired Carrier offset Paired Carrier delay 261000us Nearifar power ratio 0 4dB ACM Remote Es No dB Tx data rate ACM is Off Rx data rate ACM is Off Tx modcod ACM is Off Rx modcod ACM is Off AUPC Remote Eb No dB Current AUPC Tx power level 0 0 dB offset Figure 6 3 Status Screen The line of buttons across the top of the display i e STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST and HELP give access to the major modem functions while the tabs below the buttongs give access to individual menus Tabs are nested and several levels of tab may be displayed at once allowing the user to see where they currently are in relation to the overall menu system The main part of the screen will change with the tab menu that is selected The panel on the left hand side of the web page contains summary status information and is always displayed This area is also used to display Help information when the cursor is moved over individual menu options The Light Emitting Diodes LEDs shown in the left hand panel mimic the front panel LED indicators of the modem Note that the web browser pages served by the modem will be automatically reconfigured to hide irrelevant information and options in accordance with the available featur
110. am equipment Tx warning TS16 MF A multiframe backward alarm has been detected at backward alarm detected the Tx input indicating that equipment downstream at Tx input indicating of the receive path has failed to find multiframe sync equipment downstream and is returning an alarm On the Rx path if the of Rx has failed to find Insert Mux bearer is set to Originate then check the MF sync Rx path is also using CAS otherwise it will generate a bearer without a TS16 Multiframe Tx warning Cannot The required BUC output power cannot be hold reach power set at achieved This alarm is only displayed when the BUC modem is in terminal mode amp the modem attempts to set the BUC output power by adjusting it s output level amp a attenuator in the BUC This can be caused by too much attenuation in the cross site cabling or inability to control the attenuator in the BUC such as use of a non Paradise BUC with no input attenuator Tx warning Tx exceeds Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme 4 5Mbps limit in TPC exceeded 5 16 Tx warning Tx exceeds Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme 6 5Mbps limit in TPC exceeded 21 44 or 2 3 Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme ena 7 7Mbps limit in TPC 1 2 exceeded Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme 12Mbps limit in TPC 7 8 exceeded Configuration error data rate for FEC scheme HA 33Mbps limit in TCM 2 3 exceeded outs
111. ance and efficiency Specifically e XStream IP is the most advanced integrated suite of IP optimisation and traffic management features available in any satellite modem e XStream IP is specifically optimised to be highly efficient and reliable over satellite e XStream IP provides up to 500 000 packets per second processing capability for lightning fast IP throughput e XStream IP is simple to set up and use e XStream IP includes all IP features as standard making it very good value The design aim for the Q Flex was to create the industrys most versatile and bandwidth efficient satellite modem Among the satellite band width saving features available are e Paired Carrier allowing two carriers to be overlapped in the space segment saving up to 50 bandwidth e DVB S2 and DVBS2X state of the art Forward Error Correction FEC representing the most bandwidth efficient FEC technology available e Spectral roll off factors down to 5 saving up to 15 bandwidth compared with 20 roll off e IP compression saving up to 50 bandwidth e Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM saving up to 50 bandwidth 1 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e TCP Acceleration enabling up to 93 bandwidth utilization for TCP traffic e ClearLing adaptive Tx pre distorter providing up to 2dB compensation for linear and non linear distortion in the channel e 9 tap Rx equaliser providing compensat
112. are experienced The user can set an interference threshold and an associated time period When interference is experienced above the threshold for the defined time period then the carrier frequency will be changed at both ends of the link using Paradise s Reversionary Control feature which allows the distant modem s configuration to be changed automatically Figure 7 9 shows a 32APSK carrier in blue initially with no interference shown in red and then with interference caused by another modulated carrier Note that the interference is sufficient to reduce the Es No of the carrier by around 4dB but is not obvious by looking only at the received carrier spectrum The modem l Q constellation graph is also shown Q channel Amplitude dBm 1 000 000 500 000 0 500 000 1 000 000 channel 1224 0000MHz 70 4 80 4 Q channel Amplitude dBm Ki an 1 000 000 500 000 0 500 000 1 000 000 channel 1224 0000MHz Figure 7 9 Example LinkGuard Web Screenshots without with Interference 7 14 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook LinkGuard provides a menu option for setting a power spectral density threshold above which the modem will automatically alarm to indicate that a significant source of interference has been detected The LinkGuard Rx traffic warning alarm is displayed locally on the modem and can be accessed remotely via the modem s web server SNMP
113. arning whenever H has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem i e changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise cause untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid ln line RS or Device DTE Ready In line TR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled 9 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook ElA 530 Interface in V 35 Mode The ElA 530 interface is used inV 35 mode as follows Signal Description Circuit Electrical Old Style Number Levels Winchester DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX Sig Valid In RTS 105 RS232 C Sig Accept d Out CTS 106 RS232 Int Tx Clock Out DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX bes e p p p e 8 Sig Valid Out COMMON LINES v Shield Protective ground 101 Device DTE Ready In DTR 108 RS232 Local Loop In LL 141 18 RS23 2 Remote Loop In 140 RS23 2 The maximum data rate is
114. asured Eb No range 0 15dB 0 2dB Measured Frequency Offset 100Hz resolution Wanted signal level strength indicator centred on the middle of the Rx input range AGC Output Buffered direct AGC output for antenna tracking etc Acquisition Time Receive Filtering Performance Monitoring 12 4 Clocking and Buffering Specifications Parameter Modem Frequency Locked Loops give phase hit immune Clock Integrity operation even with poor clock sources such as routers etc Internal 0 5ppb per day External Tracking range 100ppm min Slaves Tx timing from Rx clock Bees Includes full Wee operation Buffer Clock from Satellite Disable Tx Input Plesiochronous Rx Clocking clock Includes full asymmetric operation Internal 0 5ppb per day External timing clock DTE interface only Station Reference see below 750 BNC female Station Clock Connector transformer isolated 1MHz to 10MHz in 1kHz steps accepts sinusoidal gt 0dBm or square wave e g G 703 para 10 Tx Clocking Station Reference Inputs 12 4 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 1200 RS422 compatible input 1MHz to 10MHz in 1kHz steps via Async ESC connector NB When set to 10MHZ the station reference may replace internal reference to all internal circuitry and reference outputs on the IF ports The unit automatically switches back to internal reference if the
115. ays be used when using Paired CarrierTM with IP traffic as explained in the information point below Station The Tx clock is generated from the station clock input Table 6 6 Tx Clock Source When using Paired Carrier with IP traffic it is highly advisable to A set the Tx clock source to Receive reference at one end of the link in order to fix the relative clocking for the overlapped carriers thereby preventing any similar patterns in the respective satellite frames particularly frame headers from interfering with each other Frame header clashes may show up as periodic Paired Carrier outages potentially many hours apart 6 2 4 8 Rx Clock Source Satellite This is the clock from the satellite This is converted to the rate required at the terrestrial port Tx Clock In This causes the Tx clock to be used to clock Rx data to the terrestrial port This is a plesiochronous mode and requires the receive buffer to be set to a value sufficient to accommodate both the difference in the clocks at each end of the link and any Doppler shift while also providing the required interval between buffer slips Internal This uses an internal reference clock to be used to clock data to the terrestrial port This requires the receive buffer to be set as per the Tx Clock In option Station The Rx clock is generated from the station clock input If the station clock frequency is the same as
116. be actively used for both outbound and inbound carriers It requires a satellite return channel either DVB S2 or SCPC The return channel can be used for user data as well and no special set up is required the modem will automatically ensure Es No information is returned to the transmitting modem with no material impact on bandwidth In terms of configuration the link is set up as normal using a nominal data rate modulation and FEC rate that gives the required symbol rate The only other step is switching ACM on The modcod selected by the user on the forward path represents the maximum modcod to be used when ACM is active This allows higher order modcods that cause non linear distortion in the RF chain to be avoided ACM will use all modcods up to and including the modcod set by the user It is easier to set up an ACM link as normal rather than being forced to adapt to an alternative such as setting a fixed symbol rate Uniquely for any ACM implementation other than switching ACM on no other ACM specific controls are necessary Paradise ACM works at true QEF points All DVB S2 modcods from QPSK 1 4 to 16APSK 9 10 are available and both short block and normal block sizes are supported Each modcod operates over a defined range in relation to carrier to noise level providing true quasi error free operation Rapid fading is countered by using predictive tracking to estimate what the remote Es No will do before it happens which prevents li
117. ber Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX KEE e CCA e e ee DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM R To eg f e fe p pee To o SE e COMMON LINES v Prot gnd Shield Prot ground ESCH Clocking For the interface to function as X 21 the clocking must be set as follows The Rx Clock Menu is used to set the source of the single clock from the modem as Satellite Internal or Station Clock Tx CIk In does not exist in X 21 and cannot be used The Tx clock should be set to Rx as the Tx data is clocked by the same clock as the Rx data The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors Check the phase of the Data n with respect to the Clock Outline It is possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid ln line by selecting Edit gt 7x gt Carrier and selecting RTS enabled 9 9 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Han
118. biliy oscillator Options 10MHz 5MHz 2MHz 1MHz 6 41 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Description This must reflect the actual frequency of the station clock input as the modem does not automatically measure the frequency It is used by the modem in programming the terrestrial interface clocking logic Table 6 49 Station Clock Frequency when locking the high stabiliy oscillator 6 2 11 3 Locking the High Stability Oscillator to the Station Clock This is an On Off control that determines whether the modem s internal high stability oscillator is slaved to the station clock input The high stability oscillator is used in carrier and BUC LNB control lt therefore provides a way of extending system clock synchronization to ancilliary equipment beyond the satellite modems 6 2 12 Edit gt Unit gt SAF Screen The Edit gt Unit gt SAF screen is shown in Figure 6 17 The concept of Software Activated Features SAF is explained in Section 7 4 EZ unit Sama SAF Miscellaneous Test Shots SAF test time remaining 176 0 hours Demo test shots remaining 1 SAF Mix Code YOOOOO0000000000000000000000 D4D44DF0 Run Demo Test Shot Stop Demo Test Shot SAF Code New SAF code 7 Figure 6 17 Edit gt Unit gt SAF Screen This screen displays e The remaining time period before any temporarily enabled SAF features time out e The number of unused test sh
119. c A facility exists to inject errors into the generated PRBS stream and see these reflected within the error count 6 91 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook IGES BERT Tx Generator Rx Analyser Mode Pattern PRBS 23 y Mode Pattern Data r Data Channel Channel Main channel Beie A dek e Sync Ke Syncloss Ao SE of NM threshold LAuto v loss Continue Y action Rx values track Tx On Results Sync OK 0 Average BER 0 0E 12 EE Cl Errors 0 Elapsed time Od 8h 35m Os Latency 90913 Figure 6 50 BER Test Generator Analyser Screen Data Invert allows an inverted data bit stream to be transmitted or received if selected on the analyser The Inject Error button can be used to inject a single error into the bit pattern which should increment the number of bit errors by one The Cyclic Error forces a single error to be injected periodically The frequency can be selected from a drop down box in bits which appears once the cyclic error is selected The Elapsed Time indicates the time since the test was started or restarted The Errors field indicates the total number of error bits detected since the test started The Average BER field indicates the number of bit errors in relation to the number of bits received Latency is shown in terms of both bits and time The latency is only valid when the Tx signal of the modem is fed back to the Rx in
120. cies when used to slave the high stability oscillator The options also allow the 10MHz reference to be output through the 500 BNC station clock connector 6 2 11 1 Station Clock Source None No station clock source has been selected BNC The station clock input is provided via the rear panel Station Clock BNC RS422 The station clock input is provided via the RS422 differential station clock pins on the rear panel Async ESC connector Table 6 47 Station Clock Source When providing an external 10MHz clock to the modem it must meet the following single sideband phase noise measurements at various offset frequencies 10 Hz 125 dBc Hz 100 Hz 145 dBc Hz 1kHz 150 dBc Hz 10 kHz 155 dBc Hz 100 kHz 155 dBc Hz 6 2 11 2 Station Clock Frequency The actual station clock input frequency value must be input to the modem Valid frequency values will vary depending on whether the station clock is being used for terrestrial clocking only or whether it is additionally used for carrier and or BUC LNB control The appropriate frequency input range will be automatically displayed Range 1000kHz to 10000kHz step size 1kHz Description This must reflect the actual frequency of the station clock input as the modem does not automatically measure the frequency It is used by the modem in programming the terrestrial interface clocking logic Table 6 48 Station Clock Frequency when not locking the high sta
121. ck is not used directly but is instead rate converted by the Rx PLL and would result in a different failure Check which signal the PLL uses as a backup clock Rx warning Demodulator This should not occur in normal operating circumstances FIFO overflowed Consult factory Rx warning Maximum Deframer failed to find a frame length to support TS ID multiframe period too maintenance Try reducing ESC baud rate or increasing small maximum multiframe period Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook FaultText Motes i Relays To Ter To Sat Other Rx warning Backward alarm from satellite detected at Rx input indicating Tx or downstream of Tx equipment fault Rx warning CAS multiframe backward alarm from satellite indicating equipment downstream of Tx has failed to find CAS MF sync Rx warning Backward alarm 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 from satellite indicating equipment downstream of Tx has failed Rx warning Backward alarm at Insert MUX indicating equipment downstream of Rx has failed Rx warning The final BER is worse than the user threshold set for the deferred alarm Rx warning Rx FIFO underflow on ports 1 to 4 Rx warning Rx FIFO overflow on ports 1 to 4 A backward alarm has been detected at the Rx input This indicates that equipment downstream of the transmit path i e from the modem Tx output has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to a downstream receive
122. ck receive to transmit and is normally set on one of the pair of modems usually the remote modem e The other modes are more specialized and cause a loopback at various points within the Tx Rx processing chains Note that the loopback of IP has been disabled This would cause the modem to retransmit on its terrestrial port packets that it has received and this can confuse intelligent switches which conclude that the original sending device has moved and is now on a different port which can cause traffic storms With respect to the RF Test Modes selecting Tx CW causes a pure carrier to be transmitted rather than the normal modulated carrier This is useful for evaluating phase noise and spurious but should not be used over a live satellite link without the operator s permission Selecting Modulator alternate 1 0 causes an alternating 1 0 1 0 pattern to be fed to the modulator at the symbol rate This causes two discrete frequencies to be generated spaced at the symbol rate about the Suppressed carrier This is useful for evaluating the carrier suppression of the modulator but should not be used over a live satellite link 6 2 12 BER Test The internal PRBS BER Tester shown in Figure 6 50 allows pseudo random bit patterns to be injected into the main traffic or overhead channel and the BER results to be monitored Use of the ESC and AUX channels allows continuous real traffic BER performance monitoring whilse the modem carries traffi
123. clocks at each ena Apply the following rule to both ends e f a clock is being provided via the terrestrial interface and a station clock is available then set Rx clock to Station H there is no station clock then set Rx clock to Tx Clk In as the Tx clock comes from the network this will be derived from the network master clock Set Tx clock to Tx Clk In 7 1 3 3 Determining Buffer Size The following calculation can be used to determine the buffer size required The required plesiochronous buffer size middle to end in seconds is Buffer size Bs Ms x 24 x 60 x 60 x Lc Rc Where e Lc is the local clock accuracy e g 01 x 10 e cis the remote clock accuracy e g 11 x 107 e Ms is the minimum slip period in days e g 40 days 7 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook For end to end buffering with a Doppler allowance of 2ms Bs 0 002 172800 x Ms x Lc Rc seconds Using the bracketed example figures above gives a result of 0 00898 seconds requiring a buffer size of 9ms to absorb the plesiochronous effects To this must be added any Doppler requirement e g 2ms for each satellite hop 7 1 3 4 G 703 Clock Extension The modem can provide a highly stable GPS derived clock from a hub modem to a remote modem thereby saving the cost of installing GPS devices at both ends of the link The implementation involves the use of the G 703 interface card in the modem but the resulting
124. ction Schematic TX IF L BAND MODEM A COMBINER IP TRAFFIC Je m ojo 3333 TO UPCHAIN P3480 1 1 CONTROL CABLE FROM DOWNCHAIN MODEM B RX IF L BAND SPLITTER Handshake Lines Many interfaces provide optional control lines such as RTS CTS etc It is generally better to use these if they are available 9 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Q3001 LVDS Interface The LVDS interface is used as follows Signal Description Circuit Electrical Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX EC MC eo e Ee e Int Tx Clock Out DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX es CC Sig Valid Out COMMON LINES eege ICI me Pr bes Jeepen re i fe Device DTE Ready In mi me a 23 LVDS Device DCE Ready Out mi e 22 LVDS few fa Pin fos a EC The modem can operate at high data rates using the LVDS interface but the maximum useable data rate is limited by connecting cable length The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over a 10m cable over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles e 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc Similarly the maximum data rate increases as the connecting cable length is reduced i e 20Mbps to 5m 40Mbps to 2 5m The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal war
125. d Operating Handbook X RX SENCPRCIESN Memories ss EGER Upload Upload Saved Configuration Name for new configuration Choose File No file chosen Upload Saved Configuration Figure 6 33 Edit gt Memories gt Upload Screen 6 2 9 Edit gt Redundancy Screen The Edit gt Redundancy gt 1 for 1 screen shown in Figure 6 34 controls the operation of the modem when in a 1 1 redundancy configuration The Edit gt Redundancy gt 1 for N screen and 1 N redundancy in general is documented separately in Installation and Operating Handbook for Quantum Evolution and Q Series Satellite Redundancy Switches which is available for download from http www paradisedata com X Rx ETERNA MOE Redundancy 1 for 1 ried 1 for 1 Switchover Current status Transmit fail switchover Receive fail switchover Figure 6 34 Edit gt Redundancy gt 1 for 1 Screen The Current status shows the 1 1 status of the modem This will be shown as Main when the modem is online Maintenance when the modem has been taken out of service and Standby when the modem is offline ready to switch over on a fault occurring on the online modem Transmit fail switchover controls whether a switchover occurs on a transmit alarm Likewise Receive fail switchover controls whether a switchover occurs on a receive alarm Ticking a checkbox activates the switchover logic putting it in a state where the modem will switch over when a relevant transmit o
126. dB Tx ESC level ch2 0 0 dB Rx ESC level ch2 0 0 dB Backward alarm mode ESC Interface ESC interface type AUX Interface Aux interface type Figure 13 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IDR Screen 13 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook This contains the following options IDR 8k ESC mode This controls the operating mode of the low rate IDR ESC channel which can be set to Off Synchronous or Asynchronous ESC interface baud rate IBS uses a fixed frame format and therefore the amount of overhead is limited The maximum ESC baud rate that may be selected is displayed ESC interface character length This can be set to 7 or 8 bits ESC interface parity polarity This can be set to None Even or Odd IDR ESC audio data encoding This controls audio data format for the ESC overhead in IDR mode The overhead can be set to 32 64 or 96kbps 64kbps of this can be not transmitted allocated to voice or allocated to Aux data via the Aux controls When set to Off V1 and V2 are omitted and consequently only 32kbps overhead is transmitted or the 64kbps of V1 and V2 overhead can be reallocated to Aux data via the DR Aux mode setting The 32kbps overhead includes FAS backward alarms and an 8kbps synchronous ESC channel When set to 2x16k in V1 two 16kbps ADPCM channels are provided in V1 with V2 either being omitted or being replaced with Aux data as determined by the IDR Aux mode setting When set to 1x
127. data pattern clashes between the two overlapping carriers caused by similarities in the satellite framing that otherwise can degrade Paired Carrier performance 6 2 7 2 Round trip Delay The modem needs to know the delay to the satellite in order for Paired Carrier to work Several methods of calculating the round trip delay are supported as listed in Table 6 74 Set location In this mode the modem automatically calculates the satellite round trip delay using coordinates that you enter for the modem and satellite positions Set delay This mode uses user entered minimum and maximum satellite round trip delay times and searches for the satellite between the limits The size of the delay window directly affects the carrier acquisition time and should be reduced to 0 5ms around the actual measured satellite delay as shown on the Status gt Paired Carrier screen once this has been established following Paired Carrier achieving lock Use GPS This mode allows mobile Paired Carrier operation for example on ships without ever having to change location or satellite delay information for Paired Carrier Any change in location will not affect Paired 6 71 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Carrier operation A GPS source must be attached to the modem via the modem s remote serial control port which will be automatically configured for RS232 at 4800 baud The modem polls
128. dbook X 21 DTE Operation This has only a clock to the modem from the terrestrial equipment Configure a cable with a 15 pin D male at one end X 21 DTE and a 25 pin D male at the other end as follows X 21 DIE Signal Circuit Electrical 15 pin D male Description Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX ee ee DR E Sig Valid In DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX Sig Valid Out COMMON LINES y Sooma gnd o Signal Ground EEF Prot gnd Shield Prot ground Clocking For the interface to function as X 21 the clocking must be set as follows The Tx Clocks menu should be used to take the single clock from the terrestrial by selecting Tx Clock In The Ax Clocks menu should also be set to return Rx data in time with the single Tx Clock by also selecting Tx Clock In No other combinations will work The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever H has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceabl
129. ded to the data This mode is compatible with other open network equipment IDR Intermediate Data Rate IDR is an open network standard that adds 96kbps of framing overhead to the data This mode is compatible with other open network equipment It requires an IDR option card to be fitted to the modem DVB S2 DVB S2 services can be used with both packetized and continuous data streams DVB S2 requires a hardware option card to be fitted to the modem For continuous data streams such as G 703 Closed network or Closed network plus ESC should be selected together with SmartLink as the FEC type SmartLink provides a DVB S2 service along with all of the necessary support for continuous data streams For packetized data such as IP it is normally sufficient just to select the DVB S2 service itself Alternatively should 6 11 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook additional services such as an ESC channel be required then the appropriate service such as Closed network plus ESC should be selected together with SmartLink as the FEC type DVB S2 configuration options such as FEC frame size and pilots are available under Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced DVB S2X The DVB S2X service is an extension of the DVB S2 service As well as supporting additional choices for modulation and FEC rate it supports additional roll off factors of 5 10 and 15 DVB S2X configuration options such as FEC
130. dem settings Only admin can change the passwords associated with these two user names There is no restriction on the number of users as either admin or user that can be logged in at the same time Remote admin users who log in while the modem is under local front panel control will be restricted to view only permissions 6 1 1 Local Mode Local mode allows control of the modem from the front panel interface only Web users are still able to log in and view the modem settings in this mode 6 1 2 Takeaway Mode In Takeaway mode the modem can be controlled through the front panel or via a remote admin user at the same time When the modem is switched out of Takeaway mode to Local mode then all remote admin users will be automatically logged out While Takeaway mode is very convenient it is essential for there to be clear operational procedures in place to avoid conflicts arising in relation to modem control Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 Web User Interface The modem includes an embedded web server that allows full monitoring and configuration of the modem via a web browser on port 80 Secure connections via HTTPS on port 443 are also supported Non secure connections via HTTP port 80 can optionally be disabled Google Chrome Mozilla Firefox and Microsoft Internet Explorer web browsers are supported 6 2 1 Login Screen To connect to the modem from a web browser ensure an Ethernet cabl
131. e cioiioci nocsrsiaio alce ello lc 6 72 6 2 7 5 Earth Station Lattude naa nannnos 6 72 6 2 7 6 Calculated Satellite Delay ANNE 6 73 6 2 7 7 Minimum Round trip Delay uc 6 73 6 2 7 8 Maximum Round trip Delay ciu eet ees deeg eene ed 6 73 6 2 8 Edit gt Memorles Sereen ancamane n d a n a N O Na 6 73 6 2 8 1 Edit gt Memories gt Recall Gcreen nana naancnnnn 6 74 6 2 8 2 Edit gt Memories gt Recall gt Advanced Reversionary Control Screen 6 75 6 2 8 3 Edit gt Memories gt Store Green 6 76 6 2 8 4 Edit gt Memories gt Download Gcreen 6 77 6 2 8 5 Edit gt Memories gt Upload Green 6 77 6 2 9 Edit gt Redundancy Goergen ENEE euteiches eee 6 78 AS O eent ege deen dee Been eege 6 79 6 2 10 1 Rx Spectrum Monitor acaso os Hacia adi acts 6 81 6 2 10 2 Rx Constellaton Monitor 6 82 6 2 10 3 See 6 83 6 2 10 4 Other Time based Graphs curia ii e 6 85 6 2 10 5 AMOS ld oa AA o 6 86 O2 10 6 System LO cti ea eke EE 6 87 6 2 10 7 View gt Setup Screen ENEE 6 87 6 2 10 8 EEAO eTe aT a EE E tii 6 88 6 2 10 9 View gt SAF Sre f ainena a i e A Aa a 6 89 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 241 TES sc de ee ees 6 90 62120 BERTA reia nea a als 6 91 6 3 Front panel Interface nica toi 6 93 6 3 1 Keypad Operation EE 6 93 O EE 6 93 Sr DEE le NEE 6 93 6 3 1 3 Alphanumeric EE 6 94 6 3 1 4 Special Function Keys pas 6 94 6 3 2 LOD Screen Layos ia 6 95 6 4 Front Panel Menu Structure un 6 96 64 1
132. e buffer The buffer should be set large enough to accommodate bursts of packets being received by the modem Setting the buffer larger than necessary could result in large packet delays building up should more packets be sent to the modem than can be transmitted The optimal size for the buffer depends on the link data rate the packet sizes the number of packets and the specific application some applications being able to tolerate 6 59 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook packet loss and or delays more than others When the buffer is full then received packets will be dropped until space in the buffer is freed up It is generally desirable for the terrestrial buffer to be set so that packets are not dropped unnecessarily before they have been assessed by the traffic shaper as to priority etc At the same time a large buffer could result in stale data being kept which it might be better to drop by making the buffer smaller so that only the most recent data is kept in an overload situation 6 2 3 2 Satellite Buffer Size The satellite buffer is used to buffer IP packets ready for transmission over satellite The buffer is situated after all internal packet processing has been completed including traffic shaping and encapsulation Satellite delay and the quality of the service in general can be controlled by the size of this buffer The buffer should be set large enough to even out peaks and troughs in throughput t
133. e return carrier with no material effect on bandwidth This is used to control the carrier modcod selection of the other modem should it have ACM enabled Monitor This switches ACM on in receive only This causes the modem to automatically insert regular Es No information into the return carrier which is used by the distant modem to determine the choice of transmit modcod A secondary function that is switched on is as a test mode that simulates ACM being on but does not actually change modcod Instead it records what modcods would have been selected if ACM was actually on including recording the time remote Es No and the data rate This allows ACM to be tested in a non intrusive way on a live link and also allows any projected bandwidth savings to be confirmed prior to going live The record of ACM modcod changes can be viewed graphically on the ACM graph under View gt Graphs gt IP gt ACM or as text in the system log under View gt Log Table 6 53 ACM Mode 6 51 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 8 ACM Rain Fade Margin Range OdB to 9 9dB step size 0 1dB Description This sets a margin used in the ACM control process when making decisions on what modcod to select based on the current Es No reading of the remote modem By setting the ACM rain fade margin to a non zero value ACM operation will cope with a faster rate of rain fade without losing demodulator
134. e as all our other bandwidth saving techniques It incorporates ViaSat s patented PCMA technology which is protected under U S patent numbers 5 596 439 6 011 952 and 6 725 017 This handbook will guide you through the process of installing and using your Q Flex satellite modem including the Q FlexE and Q FlexV versions Redundancy Switch operation is documented separately see Installation and Operating Handbook for Quantum Evolution and Q Series Satellite Redundancy Switches 1 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 2 About This Handbook 2 1 Conventions This warning symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of a hazard that may cause death or serious injury This information symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating instructions critical to correct system function 2 2 Trademarks All trademarks used in this handbook are acknowledged to be the property of their respective owners 2 3 Disclaimer Although every effort is made to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the information in this handbook this cannot be guaranteed and the information contained herein does not constitute a product warranty A separate product warranty statement is available Teledyne Paradise Datacom maintains a programme of continuous product improvement and reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice Q Flex Satelli
135. e data errors Check the phase of the Data In with respect to the Clock In line It is possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line by selecting Edit gt Tx gt Carrier and selecting RTS enabled P3722 G 703 Interface The G703 interface supports the following settings 9 10 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Interface Rate Bit rate Line code Impedance Card Connector Ti 1544kbps AMI 100 Ohm RJ45 Ti 1544kbps B8ZS 100 Ohm RJ45 El 2048kbps HDB3 120 Ohm RJ45 E1 2048kbps HDB3 75 Ohm BNC T2 6312kbps B6ZS 110 Ohm RJ45 T2 6312kbps B8ZS 75 Ohm BNC E2 8448kbps HDB3 75 Ohm BNC E3 34 368Mbps HDB3 75 Ohm BNC T3 44 736Mbps B3ZS 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced 750 operation is via BNC connectors and balanced 100 110 120Q operation is via RJ45 connectors For T1 operation AMI and B8ZS line code settings are available For E1 operation AMI and HDB3 line code settings are available The modem will display a Data Marginal warning whenever a line code violation is detected For T1 operation a choice of line lengths is available that cause the modem to compensate the T1 signal for any line loss associated with the cable IP Interface The IP is a standard interface supplied with the modem The modem supports two RJ45 Ethernet port for IP traffic and remote control respectively The Ethernet supports 10 100 1000Mbps data rates and uses CAT 5
136. e is connected into the Remote M amp C RJ45 socket on the rear of the modem From the modem front panel enter under Edit gt Unit gt M8 C gt IP Address an IP address and subnet mask that are compatible with your network Then enter the modem s IP address into the web browser address bar The browser will then request as shown in Figure 6 1 a user name and password The default admin and view only user passwords are both set to paradise lt is recommended that passwords are changed from their default values When entered the login details are sent in an encrypted form back to the modem Authentication Required The server 10 101 224 10 80 requires a username and password The server says Satellite Modem Restricted Area Login Required User Name Password taser Figure 6 1 Web User Interface Login Screen On successfully logging in the user will be presented briefly with the screen shown in Figure 6 2 6 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Y Q Flex modem 10 101 224 11 x W 1 ex gt C BP 10 101 224 10 index php ab F Paradise web mail 7 Teledyne webmail 4 virgin email Telegraph DW Independent 7 Paradise Datacom C Other bookmarks e A Mare TELEDYNE Q Flex DK PARADISE DATACOM 1D Q Flex modem Serial No 11000130 Mode In control Control Shared Teledyne Paradise Datacom Q Flex Modem y i Click to enter Figure 6 2 W
137. e modem from a backup copy of the software stored when the modem was manufactured Once the modem has been recovered then the standard upgrade process can be repeated 6 2 14 Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Time Screen The Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Time screen is shown in Figure 6 19 This allows the modem s real time clock to be set The modem incudes a battery and maintains the time even when powered down The modem will display a dialog box to confirm that the date and time have been changed however this will be displayed very briefly and may not be seen in every case SEN Unit Paired Carrier Memories Redundancy M amp C Station Clock PERES Miscellaneous e Current time 16 33 54 Current date 3 March 2013 New time HH MM SS New date a w Day Month 2012 sel Year Update Time Figure 6 19 Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Time Screen 6 2 1 Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Reset Screen The Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Reset screen is shown in Figure 6 20 This allows the modem to be reset following confirmation 6 44 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Redundancy Miscellaneous MES Reset Any existing links will be broken and may take several minutes to be re established Figure 6 20 Edit gt Unit gt Miscellaneous gt Reset Screen 6 2 1 Edit gt Unit gt Carrier ID Screen The Edit gt Unit gt Carrier ID screen is
138. e stream can be as high as 60 When header compression is on Ethernet UDP TCP RTP and IP packet headers are compressed in order to save satellite bandwidth The relative bandwidth saving is greater for smaller packets The compressed packets will be either bridged or routed as determined by the P mode setting Selective compression of packets can be controlled via the Edit gt P gt Header Compression screen which allows routes to be added 6 2 2 6 Payload Compression This is an On Off control that controls header compression When payload compression is on the payload of IP packets are compressed in order to save satellite bandwidth The compressed packets will be either bridged or routed as determined by the P mode setting 6 2 2 7 ACM Mode Table 6 47 lists the modes available with respect to Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM ACM converts any unused link margin into additional IP throughput 6 50 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Off When using DVB S2 this switches ACM off in both transmit and receive On This switches ACM on in both transmit and receive When ACM is on the choice of modulation and FEC rate modcod in the transmit path is dynamically matched to the reported Es No from the remote modem Symbol rate and carrier power are unchanged but data rate will vary with the choice of modcod The modem will automatically insert regular Es No information into th
139. e two RJ45 Ethernet ports on the modem are bridged together or whether they have separate IP addresses allocated to them When the Remote M amp C Ethernet port is out of the bridge then satellite IP traffic and M amp C traffic are processed separately and therefore the two modem Ethernet connectors are no longer interchangeable Care should be taken in selecting this mode for a remote modem since if the cables have been incorrectly fitted then it could result in M amp C communications with the remote modem being lost When the Remote M amp C Ethernet port is bridged to the satellite IP Traffic port then the two modem Ethernet ports act as a two port Ethernet switch 6 2 2 3 TCP Accleration This is an On Off control that controls TCP acceleration Packets received by the modem will be either bridged or routed as determined by the P mode setting When on TCP packets are processed by a Performance Enhancing Proxy PEP that overcomes performance problems associated with using standard TCP over satellite f Configuring TCP Acceleration e Bridging Mode In order to make it easier to set up TCP acceleration does not use an IP address for the IP traffic port when used in bridging mode The M amp C Ethernet port cannot be bridged to the IP Traffic port when using bridged TCP acceleration M amp C control must be provided via a separate subnet to that used for satellite traffic The modem gateway is applied to the M amp C subnet e Routing
140. eam can be forwarded out of a serial interface to a serial router that supports Cisco HDLC which can convert it back to IP In general different modem manufacturer s IP even when using HDLC is not interoperable as there is no standard defined in this area If instead DVB S2 is used then generally IP is interoperable between different manufacturers modems so long as incompatible IP features are not being used such as compression or acceleration 7 8 7 IP Connectivity Modes The modem software supports unidirectional and bidirectional point to point IP operation 7 8 8 TCP Acceleration TCP traffic as opposed to UDP requires acknowledgements to be returned to the sender as part of the protocol flow control process TCP was never intended for systems with long delays such as satellite With no acceleration TCP traffic over satellite would limit itself to a few hundred kbit s depending on the PC TCP window size regardless of the actual traffic bandwidth available over satellite Because the satellite delay is taken as evidence of link congestion TCP throttles back the amount of data it sends Acceleration allows approx 90 utilisation of whatever the available traffic bandwidth is over satellite Acceleration can be used in point to point and point to multipoint bridging modes as well as in routing mode When acceleration is used in bridging mode all UDP packets are bridged VPN packets although they use TCP cannot be accelerated b
141. eb Server Welcome Screen This screen will include the text The web user interface is in View only mode when the modem is in Local control mode in which modem control is restricted to front panel operation only The Status screen shown in Figure 6 3 will then be presented 6 2 2 Status Screen The Status screen is shown in Figure 6 3 Note that 1 N backup modems will show additional status information as defined in the document Installation and Operating Handbook for Quantum Evolution and Q Series Satellite Redundancy Switches which is available for download from http www paradisedata com 6 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Da Ale ter Q Flex PARADISE DATACOM STATUS EDIT VIEW TEST HELP Modem MaYe Setup Tx carrier frequency 1150 0000 MHz Rx carrier frequency 1150 0000 MHz Tx data rate 2 048000 mbps Rx data rate 2 048000 mbps Tx symbol rate 0 705000 Msps Rx symbol rate 0 705000 Msps Tx carrier bandwidth at 3dB 0 705000 MHz UNIT STATUS Tx carrier bandwidth at 30dB 0 757522 MHz RX TRAFFIC Traffic Tx OK since 20 29 19 on 13 04 13 Rx OK since 01 18 52 on 18 04 13 TX TRAFFIC Tx carrier status Normal IP Tx buffer fill 0 TEST MODE Demodulator 16 4 TX CARRIER Es No gt 20 de Eb No dB Rx power level 39 3 dBm Rx composite power level 49 4 d
142. ecause acceleration relies on making changes to the addresses in the original IP packet which is encrypted by the VPN as the payload of a new IP packet tunnel mode Even in transport mode where only the IP packet payload is encrypted authentication will detect when the modem alters any IP address and reject the packet at the end point Acceleration works by the modem spoofing TCP acknowledgements back to the local originating device as if they come from the remote end point eliminating the satellite delay Since there is no significant delay the originating PC assumes there is no congestion in the link and will therefore ramp up the level of TCP output to fill the available bandwidth Note that when TCP acceleration is used in both directions then the TCP acknowledgements going in each direction compete with the data in each direction Since TCP will attempt to completely fill the data pipeline there is a possibility that there will not be sufficient bandwidth available for the acknowledgements which could drastically reduce the throughput level typically in one direction The Paradise software attempts to prioritise TCP acknowledgements in this situation to prevent this from happening However a better solution is to use the IP traffic shaping feature to guarantee sufficient bandwidth for the acknowledgements 7 22 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 9 Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping provides greater contr
143. ed Carrier Redundancy Service AUPC BUC LNB Advanced Port 1 Tx Port 1 Rx Port 2 Tx Port 2 Rx Port 3 Tx Port 3 Rx Port 4 Rx Port 1 Tx El mode Mode Dropped timeslots Leave on bearer v Interface loopback C Tx data rate 0 128 mbps Baseband mode 2048k data format Timeslots to satellite 2 Figure 13 5 Tx Dropped Timeslot Screen Tx Rx Service AUPC Advanced Port1Rx MEA AA AE Port 1 Rx El mode Paired Carrier Redundancy BUC LNB Port 3 Rx Mode Of Generate bearer Loop auto originate if bearer fails Rx data rate 0 012273 mbps Baseband mode Cont 2048k data format to imeslot Figure 13 6 Rx Inserted Timeslot Screen 13 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 14 Glossary SNMP Adaptive Coding and Modulation Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation Automatic Gain Control Address Resolution Protocol Automatic Up link Power Control Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Tester Burst Information Rate Block Up Converter Channel Associated Signalling Committed Information Rate Cyclic Redundancy Check Continuous Wave Engineering Services Channel Forward Error Correction Liquid Crystal Display Low Density Parity Code Check Low Voltage Differential Signal Intelsat Business Service Intelsat Earth Station Standard Intermediate Data Rate Monitor and Control SNMP Management Information Base Multiplexer Paradise Universal Pro
144. educes the graph refresh rate The reference level for the graph i e the amplitude offset that appears at the top of the graph can be adjusted as can the amplitude resolution Persistence leaves the spectrum to build up over time and is useful for identifying transient signals such as intermittent interference LinkGuard is patented technology that monitors underneath the received carrier for any interference while on traffic It is viewed using the same Rx Spectrum Monitor screen as shown in Figure 6 38 LinkGuard is explained in Section 7 6 Auto scale vi Ref level dBm Span LinkGuard M Resolution BW 98kHz Persistence _ Scale dB Average v i Definition kl Spectral inversion Off Carrier frequency 70MHz Carrier level 18 9dBm E co 3 2 a Ki 3 a E lt Modulation 16APSK Code rate 0 851 EsiNo gt 20dB Eb No 16 8dB Est N I N 0 6dB 20 000 000 10 000 000 0 10 000 000 20 000 000 70 0000MHz BER lt 1 0E 12 04 March 2013 Figure 6 38 LinkGuard Signal Under Carrier Spectrum Monitor 6 2 10 2 Rx Constellaton Monitor The Rx Constellation Monitor feature shown in Figure 6 39 allows the modem to be used as a spectrum analyser to view the received signal spectrum 6 82 Symbol rate 39999954sps Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Graphs EE Constellation _ Persistence Spectral inversion Off Carrier frequency 70MHz Carrier
145. een From power up the modem automatically records modem and satellite link performance information for both online and offline use This information can be sent by email from the modem to any email address providing a connection from the modem to an Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP mail server is available This feature is particularly useful when providing Quality of Service reports to satellite services end users and when investigating unexplained disruptions to the satellite service It is also possible to fetch performance data over the satellite from a remote modem and then send this by email from the local modem The modem has a built in SMTP mail client By ticking the required checkboxes the following information can be sent from the modem either on demand or at preset intervals Up to a month s worth of logged Rx Eb No values Up to a month s worth of logged AUPC remote Eb No values Up to a month s worth of logged Rx power level values Up to a month s worth of logged user BER values Up to a month s worth of logged AUPC Tx power level values Up to a month s worth of logged modem temperature values The contents of the modem s event log i e all noteable events that have occurred Current system alarms i e all Unit Tx and Rx faults and warnings All configuration memories Instantaneous spectrum data Instantaneous constellation data Instantaneous PRBS BER test results 6 35 Q Flex Satellite Modem In
146. ees Es 3 esoe Fees Es a boom fioo0000 4 s Faso Foseeec Es e 260000 base Es 7 faoo000 oe Fa bet RN b Total 1000000 Tx data 1000000 H 1000000 Figure 7 13 Traffic Shaping Configuration Screen using IEEE 802 1p Priority Tags 7 8 9 4 4 MPLS EXP Stream classification may be based on MPLS QoS specifically the 3 bit EXP field in the MPLS header This is often used to support Diffserv in MPLS networks The MPLS EXP field has eight possible values mapping directly to equivalent internal modem classes 0 to 7 each of which can be shaped using its own CIR BIR etc Each packet passed to the modem must have this field set to the appropriate value in order for the modem to recognize the different data streams 7 8 9 5 Traffic Shaping Graphs A web graphing facility exists that shows a line graph of throughput in terms of bps over time for each QoS class The data for each class is not superimposed instead it is necessary to select the particular class to be monitored graphically from a dropdown box It is easy to switch between graphs for the different classes in order to check that the level of throughput is in line with expectations Graphs are time based and are shown in minute hour day and month formats It is intended to add diagnostic graphs per class in the future for errored packets and dropped packets 7 29 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 10 Static and Dynamic Routing
147. em Up to 10000 concurrent accelerated TCP connections are supported along with up to 40 000 unaccelerated TCP connections Bandwidth utilization when TCP acceleration is enabled is typically over 90 Bridging static routing and dynamic routing RIP V1 and V2 OSPF V2 and V3 and BGP V4 are all supported Ethernet IP User Datagram Protocol UDP and Real Time Protocol RTP header compression are supported The 14 byte Ethernet frame is typically compressed to one byte IP UDP RTP headers are typically compressed to between one and three bytes The one way packet processing limit for header compression is 60 000 packets per second pps the two way limit is 45 000 pps IP UDP RTP header compression is compliant with the RFC 3095 Robust Header Compression standard IP payload compression is provided compliant with the RFC 1951 DEFLATE standard This compresses TCP and UDP packet payloads by typically 50 5 2 Standard Fit Hardware 5 2 1 IF L band Operation The following are provided as standard e F operation via transmit and receive IF BNC connectors supporting 500 and 750 operation at 50 to 9OMHz and 100 to 180MHz e L band operation via transmit and receive L band N type connectors supporting 500 operation at 950 to 2150MHz e A high stability L band 10MHz reference signal for output to a Block Up Converter BUC or Low Noise Block LNB in order to phase lock the BUC or LNB s local oscillator to a highly stable freq
148. em Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 5 Edit gt IP gt Static Routes Screen The Edit gt P gt Static Routes screen shown in Figure 6 24 allows up to 16 static routes to be added Rx IP Paired Carrier Redundancy Static Routes IPv4 Destination Subnet mask Gateway Route 0 horoo 255 255 0 0 Add Route 1 PAS PA PATOS A Route 2 PA Foz Foz A Route 3 PA Fo Fo A Routed PA Fo Fo A Route 5 eer FEA Add Route 6 SV A EE Add Route 7 PAS PA POS A Route a PAS PA E Add Route 9 PAS Fc Fc A Route 10 PAS Foz PA A Route 11 AAA AAA Add Route 12 PAS PA PAS Ae Route 13 PAS Foz Foz Ae Route 14 PAS Foz Face Ae Route 15 PA Foz Fc Ae Show Routes Click to apply routes Figure 6 24 Edit gt IP gt Static Routes Screen Each route consists of a destination IP address subnet mask and a gateway address The Add button must be selected in order to enable each route The Del button is used to delete individual routes The Click to apply routes button must be selected to apply the static routes before navigating away from the web page 6 66 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The Show Routes button can be used to display the underlying operating system route add commands applied to the TCP IP stack thereby providing confirmation of the active static routes 6 2 6 Edit gt IP gt Header Compression Routes Screen The Edit gt 1P gt Header Compression Routes screen s
149. em vent slots are clear and the rear fan has not U D TATC TF RF temperature Gescht failed This alarm is a warning beyond 60 deg C and i CM becomes a fault at 70 deg C Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 11 6 Unit Warnings Fault Text lo Noe Relays To Ter To Sat Other Unit warning One or more of the cooling fans have failed Unit warning One or more e PSU rails are out of range One of the PSU on the redundancy switch have failed AE Unit warning Carrier The Tx carrier is set to mute after a power failure The muted due to power power has failed and returned The fault needs to be CM outage Acknowledge acknowledged in order to allow the carrier to be power up to enable unmuted While attempting to maintain a constant Eb No at the Unit warning AUPC at distant modem the AUPC function has adjusted the maximum power offset modem power level to the maximum offset allowed Check AUPC settings Unit warning Quad E1 gt Indicates that the Quad E1 card ports have unspecified aay nave activealarms i alarms Consult factory Indicates that one or more SAF features such as Paired Carrier that have been purchased on a temporary license are about to expire A new purchase order should be raised if the features are still required Unit warning Rental SAF features s will expire in less than 48 hours 11 7 Start up Problems Pp FaultTexe __________Notes Relays To Ter To Sat
150. encoder and decoder Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 11 5 Unit Faults To To rm LI we Iesltl ls A PSU line has failed The unit has a linear supply and Unit fault One or more will fail if the mains input is below the specified minimum U TA TC RF TF PSU rails are out of range level Check the mains voltage and the internal PCB y CM mounted low voltage fuses risa aaa ju failed Check clock source clock input Check the cable and the clock source An internal fault has This indicates that the software has been unable to TF RF occurred Please consult initialise the hardware Power the modem down and back U TA TC CM 7 factory up to see whether this clears the problem SL kel e has failed failed Contact technical support for advice i Unit fault Communications Unable to communicate with the BUC check BUC type amp SE JE e Lis eck connections F The PLL in the BUC is reporting out of lock Check Utran puC SEH The BUC is indicating an over temperature fault pu po fre temperature failure ant Laue EEN Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared U ME has lost lock GE Tx Synthihas Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared w f TF CM GE Rx Synth has Consult technical support if this alarm cannot be cleared TA TC me Unit fault occurs initially This refers to the internal unit temperature Check the as unit warning Operating mod
151. ency Stability 0 05 ppm per year L band Output Frequency Stability 0 05 ppm per year IF Harmonics Better than 55dBc 4kHz in band L band Harmonics Better than 55dBc 4kHz in band IF Spurious Better than 55dBce 4kHz in band L band Spurious Better than 55dBc 4kHz in band Transmit On Off Ratio 55dB minimum External Transmit Inhibit By external contact closure or by TTL signal applied to panel Alarms amp AGC connector 12 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 3 Rx Demodulator Specifications Parameter Modem Minimum 115 10 log symbol rate Maximum 80 10 log symbol rate Minimum 130 10 log symbol rate Maximum 80 10 log symbol rate IF Input Range L band Input Range Maximum Composite 10dBm signal Wanted to composite IF 94 10 log symbol rate Level L band 102 10 log symbol rate o GEES Selectable from 1kHz to 250kHz 10kHz steps Acquisition Threshold lt 5dB Es No QPSK At 9 6kbps less than 1s at 6dB Es No QPSK At 10 Mbps less than 100ms at 6dB Es No QPSK Clock Tracking Range 100ppm minimum Spectral roll off factors of 5 10 15 20 25 and 35 See the document Saving Satellite Bandwidth by Optimising Spectral Roll off document number AN_035 from the White Papers section of http www paradisedata com for more details including occupied bandwith calculations Me
152. eps Backward Alarms Outputs Four form c relays Inputs Four protected inputs short to OV to send alarm with matching summary Rx fail output Alarm inputs software configurable for a All external patch b 1 Rx fail and 2 4 external patch c 1 Rx fail and 2 4 OK d 1 4 Rx fail ESC Aux Ports When the IDR option is fitted independent ESC amp Aux ports on the IDR option replace the single shared ESC Aux port on the base unit 12 8 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook ESC Port RS232 RS422 or RS485 external interfaces or internal link to remote M amp C port software selected No external cabling required between the ESC and M amp C ports for M amp C via ESC channel within overhead Other devices externally wired in parallel with M amp C port can also be accessed remotely Provides clock data and sync octet timing lines IDR Synchronous access to 8kbps IDR ESC With the Async ESC option async ESC access to the 8kbps IDR ESC is provided giving up to a 9600 baud async channel Others IBS and Closed Net Plus ESC facilities as before installation of IDR option but now on ESC port on IDR card not shared ESC Aux port of base unit Aux Port RS232 or RS422 user selectable Provides clock and data lines IDR Provides 32 or 64kbps access in place of one or both audio ESC channels IBS Intelsat low rate ESC mode as previously but now via Aux port
153. er interface e A keypad for menu navigation and alphanumeric entry 5 5 1 Status Indicators The five front panel LEDs display warning and fault information as shown in Figure 5 2 and as described in Table 5 3 Green Unit OK Red Unit fault Green Rx OK Off Rx off or Rx fault Green Tx OK Off Tx off or Tx fault Status LEDs Green Carrier on Amber 1 1 standby Off Carrier off Figure 5 2 Front panel Status Indicators Off Red Amber Green Unit Status Not used Unit fault Not used Unit OK Rx Traffic Rx fault or Rx Not used Not used Rx OK disabled Tx Traffic Tx fault or Tx Not used Not used Tx OK disabled Test Mode Normal mode Not used Test mode Not used Tx Carrier Carrier muted Not used 1 1 standby Carrier active Table 5 3 Front panel LED Status 5 5 2 LCD Display The backlit LCD is a graphical display formatted to give three lines of 40 text characters and is highly legible even in strong ambient light The contrast is adjustable and the backlight can be dimmed or brightened as required 5 9 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 5 5 2 1 Keypad The keypad see Figure 5 3 is incorporated into a sealed tactile membrane and allows full alphanumeric entry and navigation using arrow keys Figure 5 3 Front panel Keypad 5 6 Rear Panel The rear panel shown in Figure 6 4 provides a full set of terrestrial and satellite data interfaces
154. es Be cca Ee ee et eet te 6 7 62 25 StatusAU PG eene EE 6 8 6 2 2 6 Status BUC LNB e r eae Eee A e ie Aas Enade aasi 6 8 0 23 ele E EE 6 8 6 2 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service Screen oooocccnoccccnncccnncncnnncnonananonananonancnnnccnnananonanonnnannns 6 9 6 2 4 1 Terrestrial Interface 6 10 6 242 Rx Values Track Tica id 6 11 62 453 VEXARXISCIMICO Tn le oe ol Aes Nhe Sos a hai al Aas a ae en 6 11 6 2 4 4 Tx Rx Rate Control 6 12 6 2 4 5 Tx RXx Data Rate ooccccoccccnccccnocccnnncccnnccnnoncnonananonanononanonnncnonanann nana nnnanannn 6 12 6 22 46 Keren 6 13 6 2 4 7 Tx Clock e TT 6 14 6 2 4 8 RX ele SOU a a a a a a a a aA 6 14 6 2 4 9 Tx Rx FEC Type EEN 6 15 6 2 4 10 TXAxModUlatiOO oia Ae SES 6 15 6 2 4 11 TOR BEG GOdG EE 6 15 6 24 12 TXRX Frequency Eege eegene Ee 6 17 6 2 4 18 Tx Rx Carrier Frequency inuit elie 6 17 6 2 4 14 Tx Rx Spectral Roll off ooo 6 18 6 2 4 15 Tx Rx Spectral Inversion oooooccccnnccccnncconocccccnccconanannnnncnnnnncnonannnnnnncnnns 6 19 6 2 4 16 IF L band Output Eed ee ee eegene ege egEee 6 19 6 2 4 17 Modem BUG Carrier nic EE 6 20 6 2 5 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service gt Advanced Screen occccnccccnncccnncnonnncnnnnnnnnnananananinanons 6 20 6 2 5 1 DVB S2 Tx Rx Pilot TONGS ooccconcccnccccnnccccnnccnnnnccnnnanonanononananonananonaninon 6 20 6 2 5 2 DVB S2 Tx Rx Frame Gize ccc eccceecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueesueeeeueeeseaeeenaues 6 21 6 2 5 3 Sweep Mode A A O A rennet 6 21 6 2 54 SWeep Wii a e 6 21 6
155. es and the current user selections Actual web pages may therefore look significantly different to those shown in this handbook Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook wl osos PARADISE DATACOM STATUS Modan ID Q Flex modem Setup Serial No 11000130 Mode In control Control Shared Figure 6 4 Modem Summary Status Summary status information for the modem is shown at the top left hand side of the screen as shown in Figure 6 4 This presents the following e ID The user entered modem identification text string e Serial No The modem serial number e Mode This will show either In control when the web user has full control over the modem or View only when the web user is restricted to viewing modem information but cannot change the modem s configuration The Status screen contains the current modem status split over several screens as described in the following sections 6 2 2 1 Status Setup The Setup section of the Status screen is continually updated with the following information e Transmit and receive carrier frequencies e Transmit and receive terrestrial data rates e Transmit and receive symbol rates In addition the following are shown e Transmit carrier bandwidth at the 3dB point e Transmit carrier bandwidth at the 30dB point These are useful for performing bandwidth comparisons between different modem configurations including the
156. essages can be sent over the satellite ESC channel at the same time as IP packets provided that the M amp C messages are prefixed with ESC as described in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Flex Satellite Modem 13 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook For IP the modem will allocate internal IP addresses to each end of the ESC channel and these will only be visible internally within the modem The RS485 Local and RS485 Remote modes are referred to as Link Local and Link Remote respectively These modes create internal links between the ESC port of the modem and the Remote M amp C port in order to facilitate passing M amp C messages over satellite to control a remote modem without the need for external loopback cables between the Async ESC and Remote M amp C ports Both point to point and point to multipoint RS485 over the ESC channel are supported The following drawing shows the internal connections that are made ESC Tx ESC Rx M amp CRx M amp CTx ESC Tx ESC Rx M amp CRx M amp CTx A p al B Y Link Local A gt al p gt lt Link Remote With both of these options the physical ESC port is disabled due to being internally linked to the M amp C port The mode must be set according to whether the modem is at the local or remote end of the link 13 3 Q Flex Satellite M
157. estricted broadcast domain so not everyone sees all traffic plus added security Transparent VLAN operation is supported in bridging mode 7 31 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 13 Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM uses feedback from the receiver to the transmitter to respond to changes in channel conditions to optimise throughput by providing only the level of error protection that is required ACM can be used in both directions at the same time maximising throughput for outbound and return Deployed links have reported throughput gains of up to 100 ACM works in conjunction with DVB S2 S2X although the return channel does not have to be DVB S2 S2X unless ACM operation is required for both outbound and inbound Carriers By varying the error correction strength to match atmospheric conditions link margin is converted into useful bandwidth Modulation and FEC rate modcod is dynamically matched to the current Es No returned from the remote modem Symbol rate is kept constant changing the terrestrial data rate up or down with Es No ACM operation automatically accounts for all other link impairments including antenna alignment error inclined orbit phase noise and other degradations ACM can be used on point to point IP links ACM must be on in Tx on the transmitting modem and Rx in the receiving modem It must be on in both Tx and Rx in both modems if ACM is to
158. et along with a maximum transmit power level for the local end The transmit power is adjusted to keep the remote Eb No at the target value If the satellite link is lost then the transmit power can be frozen at its current level until the link is restored or it can be returned to its nominal value 7 2 2 Configuring AUPC To use the AUPC function the following procedure should be followed 1 Prior to switching on AUPC configure the modems at both ends of the link and ensure the satellite link is operating correctly 2 Set the transmit power to achieve the remote Eb No expected under clear sky conditions 3 To receive an indication of when the remote Eb No falls below a defined threshold set a target Eb No minimum threshold which will cause a backward alarm to be generated under these conditions 4 Set the AUPC mode to monitor the remote Eb No in order to determine if it is working correctly If the remote end Eb No is not available on the Status screen then the modems are not configured correctly 5 Record the remote Eb No under clear sky conditions and then set the AUPC mode to maintain the remote Eb No 6 Seta target Eb No and set the maximum power level 7 Review the remote Eb No to confirm that it is being maintained correctly under different atmospheric conditions The web user interface remote Eb No and power graphs can be used to review AUPC performance 7 9 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook
159. ets the threshold period for consecutive buffer slips above which a deferred alarm is generated A setting of 0 zero disables this alarm Table 6 44 Buffer Slip Alarm Threshold 6 2 10 5 BUC DC Current Alarm Even when there is no communications path between the BUC and modem it is still possible for the modem to monitor the BUC for under over current and over temperature conditions that cause the BUC to shut down Table 6 45 describes how to set the BUC minimum and maximum DC current levels outside of which a BUC DC current alarm will be raised if BUC DC alarm enable is set 6 39 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Range 0 1A to 6 04 step size 0 01A Description Sets the trip threshold at which a fault is declared when the current drawn by the Tx ODU is outside the limit Both a minimum and a maximum current threshold can be set These set the current thresholds outside of which an alarm will be generated Table 6 45 BUC DC Current Minimum Maximum 6 2 10 6 LNB DC Current Alarm From the second half of 2014 onwards hardware support has been added to the modem to monitor the LNB current Table 6 46 describes how to set the LNB minimum and maximum DC current levels outside of which an LNB DC current alarm will be raised if LNB DC alarm enable is set Range 0 to 500mA step size 1mA Description Sets the trip threshold at which a fault is declared when the curre
160. etwork traffic not intended for satellite has the potential to push the modem over it packet processing limit TCP acceleration works to the maximum data rate of the modem Header compression on the IP Traffic card works to 58 000 packets per second one way 29 000 two way 7 8 4 Jumbo Ethernet Frame Support The modem supports Ethernet frames up to 10k bytes in length For optical Ethernet this is increased to 16k bytes 7 8 5 IP Over ESC The Engineering Service Channel ESC is a low rate independent data channel from the main data channel that exists within some framed satellite services such as IBS and Closed Network plus ESC It was originally intended for inter earth station communications and is often used for M amp C control of remote equipment 7 20 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The ESC is implemented as an internal serial interface run at baud rates up to a maximum of 115kbps The ESC interface type needs to be set to IP to put the ESC into IP mode Because the ESC is a serial interface IP will not run directly on top of it the modem encapsulates IP packets within PPP much the same as a dial up modem connecting to the internet When used for IP the ESC channel runs in bridge mode with the M amp C port being bridged to the ESC channel Since the ESC channel acts as a bridge some bandwidth may be consumed by broadcast traffic finding its way onto it and it is best to minimize th
161. ex link where you must be able to receive your own uplink signal off satellite It works only with bent pipe transponders where there is no demodulation remodulation or cross strapping between transponders The transponder must do no more than filter frequency convert and amplify the signal Q Is it difficult and time consuming to install and set up Paired Carrier A No The operator sets the satellite delay or alternatively the modem and satellite positions to allow the satellite signal to be acquired A few other parameters specific to Paired Carrier need to be set up Set up takes less than five minutes in total Q Is Paired CarrierTM available as a field upgrade A Yes All Q Flex modems can be field upgraded to support Paired Carrier operation to the desired cancellation bandwidth Q Is Paired Carrier affected by spectral inversions A Yes Paired Carrier will operate correctly if the following simple spectral inversion rules are observed a Try to keep the signals in the space segment non inverted This keeps everything conceptually straightforward If the ground segment uplink equipment contains a spectral inversion then you should put a Tx spectral inversion in the modem to correct for it This ensures that the signals in the space segment are spectrally non inverted b If the ground segment downlink equipment contains a spectral inversion e g due to an inverting LNB then you should put an Rx spec
162. frame size and pilots are available under Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced Table 6 2 Tx Rx Service 6 2 4 4 Tx Rx Rate Control Data rate This allows the user to enter a data rate from which a symbol rate is calculated Symbol rate Tthis allows the user to enter a symbol rate from which a data rate is calculated Table 6 3 Tx Rx Rate Control 6 2 4 5 Tx Rx Data Rate Range 0 0048Mbps to 160 0Mbps step size 0 000001 Mbps Description The terrestrial data rate is the maximum number of data bits that the modem will process in relation to the selected terrestrial interface The relationship between the terrestrial data rate and the size of the satellite channel is complex The modem will calculate and display the channel symbol rate for the current configuration or alternatively for link budget analysis a comprehensive Rate Calculator is available from Technical Support For IP the terrestrial data rate must allow for all overhead due to IP headers and Ethernet frames As an alternative to setting the terrestrial data rate the modem also allows the satellite link symbol rate to be set and will use this to determine the terrestrial data rate 6 12 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook When a baseband mode other than Continuous is used then the terrestrial data rate will be automatically fixed in accordance with the services that are being used suc
163. g contents to the browser device Graphs Alarms Date Mar 5 16 30 18 Mar 5 09 22 28 Mar 5 02 44 26 Mar 5 02 44 22 Mar 5 02 44 19 Mar 5 02 44 17 Mar 4 18 49 12 Mar 4 18 49 08 Mar 4 18 49 03 Mar 4 18 49 00 Mar 4 18 48 59 Mar 4 18 48 55 Mar 4 17 27 13 Mar 4 17 27 09 Mar 4 10 53 57 Mar 4 10 53 56 Mar 4 10 53 55 Mar 4 10 53 54 Download Log file Alarm admin login 175147904 admin login 32336257 ACM APSK16 R9_10 15 4 dB 22137904 bps Fault Cleared No transport traffic Fault Raised No transport traffic ACM APSK16 R8_9 14 3 dB 21344741 bps ACM APSK16 R9_10 15 4 dB 22137904 bps Fault Cleared No transport traffic Fault Raised No transport traffic ACM APSK16 R5_6 14 1 dB 19993959 bps ACM APSK16 R8_9 14 3 dB 21344741 bps ACM APSK16 R9_10 14 8 dB 21612517 bps admin login 32336257 admin login 32336257 ACM A4PSK16 R9_10 15 1 dB 22137904 bps ACM APSK16 R9_10 14 6 dB 21612517 bps ACM APSK16 R5_6 13 0 dB 19993959 bps Fault Cleared No transport traffic Figure 6 45 System Log Screen 6 2 10 7 View gt Setup Screen The View gt Setup screen shown in Figure 6 46 displays the current values of the most important configuration settings 6 87 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Graphs Alarms Setup Tx service Rx service Tx baseband mode Rx baseband mode Tx data rate 2 048000 mbps Rx data rate 2 048000 mbps Tx symbol rate 0 009600 msps Rx symbol rate 0 009600 msp
164. g to be viewed e Graphs These include spectrum constellation throughput and time based performance graphs None of these interfere with the service being provided by the modem e Alarms System alarms and warnings can be viewed e Log The system log can be viewed and optionally emptied The log contains information on all alarms and other noteable events The log contains space for thousands of entries The oldest entries are deleted when space is required for new entries e Setup This provides a succinct summary of the operational setup of the modem e Unit This provides manufacturing information including the software version number and the hardware fitted power supply voltage levels modem temperature indication loopback status and the IP address of the M amp C port for when this has been set using DHCP e SAF This displays all of the SAF features for the modem indicating whether they are enabled or disabled It also shows how many test shots remain along with the remaining test time Information on temporary SAF such as any temporary licenses is also available 6 79 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Graphs A Please click the required graph tab Figure 6 35 View Screen Viewing Graphs Graphing requires the Java Runtime Environment JRE to be installed on the browser device This can be downloaded from various web sites including http www java com The first time that a graph
165. h as rain that degrade the performance of satellite links It does this by monitoring the remote end signal to noise ratio Eb No and automatically 7 8 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook adjusting the local power output of the satellite link in order to maintain the specified remote end Eb No Note that if the rain is falling at the local end of the link then the power seen at the satellite will be unchanged However if the rain is falling at the remote end of the link then the power seen by the satellite will increase which if not controlled carefully has the potential to affect other carriers or saturate the transponder Carrier power must be kept to the levels agreed with the satellite operator Remote Eb No monitoring is performed by sending messages through the asynchronous ESC channel which is carried over the satellite multiplexed with the main data channel When using DVB S2 which does not have an inherent ESC channel Eb No information is injected at a low rate with extremely low overhead into the return channel An asynchronous ESC channel is available in Closed Network Plus ESC IBS and IDR modes AUPC can share the ESC channel with other traffic such as remote M amp C commands The modem can be set to simply monitor the remote Eb No or to maintain it at a specified level A deferred alarm can be set to activate if the remote Eb No falls below a user set threshold A target Eb No level has to be s
166. h as the number of timeslots used for a G 703 service The minimum and maximum data rate limits are determined by a number of factors such as the terrestrial interface type type of service FEC type and FEC rate The modem will generally prevent invalid data rates from being set and in the event that a limit is exceeded then a configuration warning will be generated Table 6 4 Tx Rx Data Rate 6 2 4 6 Tx Rx Symbol Rate Range 0 0096Msps to 45 0Msps step size 0 000001Msps Description As an alternative to setting the terrestrial data rate it is possible to set the symbol rate for the satellite link which will then determine the data rate In the absence of the user setting the symbol rate it will be determined by other settings such as the terrestrial data rate modulation and FEC rate Table 6 5 Tx Rx Symbol Rate 6 13 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 7 Tx Clock Source Tx Clock In The external clock supplied on the interface Clock In line will be used Should this clock fail then the modem will switch to an internal backup clock Internal The Tx clock is generated from an internal frequency reference This is also output on the Int Tx Clock Out line for use by external equipment Receive reference The Tx clock is generated from the Rx clock This is only of any practical use when the Rx clock is set to Satellite or Station This setting should alw
167. h to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Edit gt Tx gt Carrier and selecting RTS enabled Please note Although the HSSI cable uses the same connector as the SCSI 2 specification the cable impedances of HSSI and SCSI 2 cables are different SCSI 2 cables can be as low as 70Q whereas HSSI cables are specified at 110 Ohms As a result cables made to SCSI 2 specifications may not work correctly with HSSI Incompatibilities will be more apparent with longer cable lengths ElA 530 Interface in RS422 Mode The ElA 530 interface is used in RS422 mode as follows 9 4 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Signal Description Circuit Electrical Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX pwr ee fe Er SIE kee A CA fe Int Tx Clock Out DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX MZ CC A Sig Valid Out COMMON LINES IA ECO EC e IO om A Device DTE Ready In ml wm 23 RS422 Device DCE Ready Out mim e 22 RS422 eer CI CA Je DO CIO CO AC CI Je The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal w
168. hat would result from setting an extremely small buffer Setting the buffer larger than necessary could result in large packet delays building up should more packets be available than can be transmitted The traffic shaper can be used to ensure that the combined output from all classes of traffic does not exceed the available satellite bandwidth even when ACM which dynamically adjusts the data rate is active The optimal size for the buffer depends on the link data rate the packet sizes the number of packets and the specific application some applications being able to tolerate packet loss and or delays more than others When the buffer is full then new packets for transmission will be dropped until space in the buffer is freed up 6 2 3 3 Ethernet Address Learning By default Ethernet or MAC address learning is not enabled on the modem This helps to protect against the possibility of traffic storms caused by inadvertent loops in the network However when the 4 port Ethernet expansion switch is fitted to the modem then it is strongly recommended that Ethernet address learning is enabled If address learning is disabled when the 4 port switch is fitted then traffic sent to one port will also be flooded onto all other ports since the modem will be unaware of which devices are connected to which switch port While a small amount of flooding is acceptable as a means of automatically detecting and adapting to changes in the network it is undes
169. he equivalent of the two audio ports on the P1348 P1448 ie can transmit 64kbps 2 audio channels or 128kbps 2 audio channels plus 64 kbps data from main data port In IDR modes these are used to access the IDR Audio ESC channels One or both Audio ESCs may be dropped in favour of 32 or 64kbps access to the channel by the Aux port 10 8 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Backward Alarms jee eO een O O N O indicates normal open in the normal non alarm state amp N C normally closed in the non alarm state Unlike the modem fault relays the backward alarms are not normally energised and fall back to the Normal state when modem power is removed The modem deferred alarm acts as a summary backward alarm and activates when any backward alarm is received this does fall back to the Fal state when power is removed Backward alarm inputs float to the Good state high 5V and indicate Fal when connected to OV The Rx summary fault is an open collector output OV Fail open collector OK From the front panel the backward alarm inputs BA x can be set as follows E Ext A Auto Rx fail O OK Menu Opt BA 1 BA 2 BA3 BA4 Mode 1 EEEE Ext patch Ext patch Ext patch Ext patch Mode 2 AEEE Rx Fail Ext patch Ext patch Ext patch Mode 3 AOOO Rx Fail Good Good Good Mode 4 AAAA Rx Fail Rx Fail Rx Fail Rx Fail If external patching is required connect the Rx summary fault to the required BA input and any other modem f
170. he tags to decide which packet to transmit over satellite first when it has more than one packet to send Two modes are supported namely Strict Priority Queuing and Fair Weighting Queuing e Strict priority queuing packets are queued for transmission based solely on their priority highest will always be sent first e Fair weighting queuing higher priority transmitted first but lower priority packets are given a percentage of the bandwidth to stop total starvation The 8 QoS priority levels are mapped to three TCP IP queues Packets with highest QoS priority level 7 are sent to high priority TCP IP queue Delay sensitive packets QoS levels 6 and 5 are sent to the medium priority queue The remainder QoS levels 4 to 0 are sent to the low priority TCP IP queue For Strict priority queuing all packets in high priority queue are processed before any in medium priority queue which in turn are processed before any in the low priority queue For Fair weighting queuing for every 4 packets sent from high priority queue 2 are sent from medium queue and 1 from low priority queue The example shown in Figure 7 13 is a traffic shaping scheme based on priority tagging 7 28 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Quality of service scheme Diffserv DSCP y Enable shaping V Quality of service IP address class Source address port y Input Mode Gos cir bps BiR bps Priority boom boom ox ees baeec Es 2 ses F
171. he unit is being installed in a rack then adequate ventilation and cooling should be provided There must be adequate clearance around the two side mounted fans and the ventilation holes on both sides of the unit For rack mounting there are screw positions on the unit s front panel for attaching it to the rack but these must always be used in conjunction with suitable L brackets underneath the unit to support its weight 4 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 4 4 Getting Started Connect the appropriate cables to the transmit and receive IF and or L band connectors at the rear of the unit along with the cable s for the traffic interface Power the unit and wait for it to complete its initialization when it will display summary status information From the front panel menu select Main gt Edit gt All in order to set the configuration prior to operation It is also possible to set up the unit from a web browser as described in Section 7 4 When setting up a number of units that have similar configurations the configuration settings of one unit can be saved extracted and then transferred to each of the other units in turn This procedure is explained in Section 7 4 3 Getting started is covered in more detail in the Q Flex modem Quick Start Guide provided with the unit 4 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter5 Introduction 5 1 Overview The Q Flex sate
172. his mode is similar to Hub TCP acceleration but preserves the original Ethernet frames over satellite allowing for example s TCP acceleration of any number of VLANs and acceleration of MPLS streams In this mode for ease of use there is no need to enter an IP address for the IP Traffic port Since the TCP packets are bridged over satellite there is no need to set up static routes or gateways Remote Bridged TCP acceleration This mode is similar to Remote TCP acceleration but preserves the original Ethernet frames over satellite The IP Traffic port does not have an IP address in this mode Static routes and gateways are not required Table 6 63 Point to multipoint Mode 6 2 3 5 VLAN Filtering VLAN filtering is used in point to multipoint mode only in order to ensure that just the relevant packets are processed at each remote site with all non relevant packets being discarded The hub modem will automatically add the appropriate VLAN tags to the packets to to be transmitted to the remote modems Filtering out irrelevant packets at the remote sites stops them circulating in the wider network and potentially causing packet storms 6 61 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook When VLAN filtering is disabled VLAN tags are not generated or removed by the modem This means that no filtering of traffic based on VLAN ID takes place Since each remote modem receives the same broadcast traffic a
173. hould be downloaded from the web site to a temporary location that can be accessed by the browser and modem Using the Open button it is necessary only to browse to the location of the upgrade file and open the file During the upgrade process the modem will drop any service that it is providing Feedback on the progress of the upgrade which typically takes around two minutes is provided on the screen The modem will restart automatically when the upgrade is complete and will resume operation using the same configuration as prior to the upgrade A remote modem can be upgraded over the satellite link by browsing to the remote modem s IP address and following the same upgrade process Note that the speed of the upgrade is dependent on the bandwidth available over satellite An approximate time can be worked out by comparing the size of the upgrade file with the bandwidth available In the event that an upgrade is unsuccessful then the modem will revert to a backup version of software This will normally be the same version as the software that the modem shipped from the factory with However it is possible to set the fallback software to any version please consult Technical Support for further details To revert to the backup version of software in the modem hold down the MAIN key at power up then when the menu appears press 5 this is a hidden menu option This 6 43 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook boots th
174. hown in Figure 6 25 allows up to 16 static routes to be added These determine which packets header compression is applied to Compression is both transparent and lossless Route 0 Route 1 Route 2 Route 3 Route 4 Route 5 Route 6 Route 7 Route 8 Route 9 Route 10 Route 11 Route 12 Route 13 Route 14 Route 15 Show Routes Static Routes IPv4 Paired Carrier ss Ss y Ss py mr Ss gegen Ss y nn y Memories Redundancy Header Compression IPv4 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Click to apply routes Add Add Add Figure 6 25 Edit gt IP gt Header Compression Routes Screen 6 67 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Each route consists of a destination IP address and subnet mask The Add and Del buttons enable and disable each route respectively Note that routes can be applied even when in bridging mode The Click to apply routes button must be selected to apply the header compression routes before navigating away from the web page The Show Routes button can be used to confirm the active header compression routes 6 2 7 Edit gt Paired Carrier Screen The Edit gt Paired Carrier screen shown in Figure 6 26 is used to set up the Paired Carrier function which allows two carriers to be overlapped in the same space segment Tx Rx uni
175. ia an industry standard 50 way SCSI 2 DCE connector 5 3 1 8 Quad E1 Option Card The Quad E1 option card part number P3706 supports four synchronous G 703 HDB3 encoded balanced RJ45 ports Along with full E1 bearers Drop and Insert of up to 32 timeslots is provided on all four interfaces The Quad E1 card and G 703 card are compatible when used for a single full E1 All data rates between 64kbps and 8448kbps are supported in multiples of 64kbps The data is multiplexed onto a single carrier using either an IBS frame format with overhead of 6 7 or Closed Network frame format with no overhead or Closed Network ESC frame format with overhead of less than 0 5 The absolute minimum amount of bandwidth is used in all cases in direct proportion to the required number of timeslots The Quad E1 card MultiMux feature allows E1 serial and IP traffic to be multiplexed together onto a single carrier Multimux operation is explained in the document Multimux Data Multiplexer Option Application Note No 205348 from the modem documentation area of http www paradisedata com It allows many different combinations of interfaces to be combined onto a single carrier including e Up to two Els plus up to 2Mbps of IP and up to 2Mbps of ElA 530 data or up to three E1s when using either IP or EIA 530 but not both e Up to two Ets plus up to 4Mbps of IP 5 4 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e E1 with two separate
176. ible upper amp lower limits DPLL unlocked Tx fault Data input all Quad E1 fault indicating AIS all 1s i e no data is being ones on ports 1 to 4 received on the specified Quad E1 card terrestrial ports Tx fault Drop mux fault Quad E1 card data input fault when trying to drop on ports 1 to 4 specified timeslots from specified E1 ports onto transmitted carrier Tx fault FastLink Aligned FastLink error whereby FEC is unable to process the data Uncoded FIFO overflow to be transmitted due to an internal buffer overflow Tx fault Data failure to Unspecified DVB S2 modulator fault Consult factory modulator OU o Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 11 2 Transmit Warnings Fault Text o Notes Relays ToTer ToSat Other Tx warning Maximum Framer failed to find a frame length to support TS ID multiframe period too maintenance Try reducing ESC baud rate or small increasing maximum multiframe period Tx warning Frame A frame backward alarm has been detected at the backward alarm detected Tx input This indicates that equipment downstream at Tx input indicating Rx of the receive path has failed and is returning an output or downstream Rx alarm This may be due to any receive downstream equipment fault equipment but could be due to the modem Rx output failing Check the modem Rx path status and that the Rx data output from the modem is connected to the downstre
177. ide interface range exceeded Tx warning G703 carrier Modem is set to use the G703 terrestrial interface lost but no G703 signal has been detected check configuration of G703 interface Tx warning Carrier out of The carrier frequency selected for the Tx carrier has range exceeded the permissible range for the configured symbol rate Tx warning Line Code Line code violations have been detected on the Violation detected G703 interface check configuration of G703 interface rate outside range permissible symbol rate check the configuration Tx warning Data clock The phase of the input clock and data is checked to inverted data changing ensure the data is stable when it is actually latched state on wrong edge into the modem This message means that the data is changing at this critical time and it will cause data errors Check the A 8 B clock lines are not reversed Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 11 3 Receive Faults FaultText Notes Relays ToTer ToSat oOther The demodulator can lock to the carrier and the inner Rx fault RS de interleaver FEC decoder to the demodulated data However the unable to sync to decoded Reed Solomon de interleaver cannot synchronise with TA TC SB RF data Check RS settings the decoded data Check the RS de interleaving depth and the values of n and k Rx fault Demodulator The demodulator cannot find a carrier to lock to at the spec
178. ified frequency Check the frequency data rate and Ge Check modem FEC settings Check the demodulator by enabling IF TA TC SB RF ge loopback test mode Rx fault Cannot find frame The modem cannot find the IBS or IDR frame sync on Syne on Rx data check the receive data Check the Rx Service settings EN TA TC Rx Service settings Rx fault Cannot find IBS A S The modem cannot find the IBS TS32 multiframe sync on ee Syne on the receive data although it has found frame sync Ro TA TC 8 Modem is set to loop bearer but no bearer was detected oe EES at Tx input The bearer is currently being generated by 9 9 the insert mux The modem cannot find the IBS CAS multiframe sync on the receive data although it has found frame sync and TS32 multiframe sync CAS Multiframe sync is used to convey either 1 Channel Associated Signalling CAS in G 732 Drop Insert modes using CAS 2 To maintain the identity of a group of timeslots in some cases 3 To maintain Robbed Bit Signalling RBS in T1 D4 or T1 Rx fault CAS multiframe ESC Drop Insert modes Check as follows for each use TATC SB RF sync lost 1 The Tx modem is set to operate in CAS mode if CAS l signalling is to be conveyed within the IBS SMS overhead 2 If the Tx modem cannot use a CAS Multiframe to maintain the TS identity for the Odd values of N then to prevent this modem seeking a CAS multiframe for one of these values set timeslot identity to Do not maintain 3
179. in an attempt to maintain the Eb No at its target level using the Eb No from its own received carrier rather than the Eb No value being passed back from any remote modem P300 This should be selected when interoperating with a P300 series modem Table 6 25 AUPC Method 6 2 3 6 Carrier Loss Action Set Nominal to The AUPC delta power is set to zero causing the carrier to return to its nominal power level Freeze at current value The carrier power is frozen at its current value Set to max The AUPC delta power is set to the maximum power limit as defined by Maximum AUPC power offset Table 6 26 Carrier Loss Action 6 2 3 7 Local Demod Unlocked Action Off When set to Off then the Local demod unlocked action has no effect and only the Carrier loss action is used The distinction between the two carrier loss actions is as follows The Carrier loss action covers the situation where the distant modem s demodulator has unlocked resulting in no Es No information being available from the distant modem In this situation you may for example want to increase the AUPC uplink level from the local modem to the maximum The Local demod unlocked action covers the situation where 6 24 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook the local demodulator has unlocked also resulting in no Es No information being available from the distant modem In this
180. ined equally on a wide range of satellite links ranging from traditional low rate SCPC links to high rate broadcast video and IP Initial DVB S2 satellite modem products in the industry reflected the high pioneering costs of the technology and were aimed at high end broadcast video and IP markets Teledyne Paradise Datacom is proud to bring this technology to a much wider market in the form of the cost competitive Q Flex modem which provides backwards compatibility for legacy SCPC links and a painless migration path to newer bandwidth saving technology The Q Flex allows e DVB S2 outbound with an SCPC return or an SCPC outbound with a DVB S2 return e DVB S2 outbound and return e SCPC outbound and return e SmartLink mode where SCPC features are combined with DVB S2 space segment savings All traditional SCPC features such as IBS IDR Drop and Insert ESC AUPC etc are supported DVB S2 does not directly support any of these SCPC features and therefore SmartLink was developed to allow existing SCPC services to benefit immediately by switching to the newer highly efficient DVB S2 technology without compromising the services being provided SCPC DVB S2 and SmartLink processing paths through the modem are shown in the diagram overleaf The top path Interface Framer Outer FEC Inner FEC Modulator Demodulator shows the path used in SCPC processing and the functionality that is associated with each of these blocks The lower path In
181. ingle amplifier particularly with higher order modulations when testing at a single site 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 At each modem set either location information or alternatively the round trip delay to satellite via the Round trip delay setting on the Edit gt Paired Carrier menu If location information is entered for the modem position then the satellite delay will be calculated automatically To minimise acquisition time when using a round trip delay the delay should be specified to within 1ms of the nominal value that you have calculated Enable the Tx carrier in the first modem Both demodulators should lock Rx traffic LED should go green Enable the Tx carrier in the second modem Both demodulators should go out of lock Rx traffic LED should go out Please note the combined carrier power will increase by 3dB when the second carrier is enabled Enable Paired Carrier in the first modem via the Paired Carrier enable setting on the Edit gt Paired Carrier menu Its demodulator should lock Rx traffic LED should go green Enable Paired Carrier in the second modem via the Paired Carrier enable setting on the Edit gt Paired Carrier menu Its demodulator should also lock Rx traffic LED should go green Enable the BER test and check for data transparency in both directions Inject errors via the BER testers in both directions and ensure they are received correctly If the modems do not loc
182. iod is specified by the Server timeout value Table 6 34 RADIUS Server IP Address and Fallback Address 6 2 6 3 RADIUS Shared Secret The Shared secret is a user assigned alphanumeric string which is used as an authentication key essentially a password between the RADIUS client in the modem and the RADIUS server on the network 6 29 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Note for RADIUS Network Administrators The modem RADIUS authentication feature will work out of the box subject to the modem having access to a RADIUS server on the user s network By default all authorised users will receive administrator privileges If you want some users to get administrator access and some view only access then customisation of the RADIUS server configuration is required as explained below The standard RADIUS Access Accept response from the RADIUS server can have an optional field added to it in order to distinguish between administrator and view only user login authorisation This involves the addition of a vendor specific attribute using an SMI network management private enterprise code of 64534 to denote Teledyne Paradise Datacom which is one of a range reserved for private use A vendor specific attribute named Access Level is used where a value of 0 equates to Modem Administrator and a value of 1 equates to Modem User view only If the modem receives an Access Accept response with n
183. ion for linear distortion in the channel such as from group delay The equaliser is automatically switched on in all modes of operation above 10Msps New levels of usability are provided by a leading set of built in diagnostic tools including spectrum and constellation monitors that facilitate the detection of any link degradation In addition LinkGuard is patented technology US patent 8351495 that monitors underneath the received carrier for any interference while on traffic The Q Flex modem is backwards compatible with all Quantum and Evolution series modems DVB S2X the successor to DVB S2 is the most efficient and robust coding and modulation standard available for satellite transmission Paradise s SmartLink technology allows non packetized continuous traffic such as G 703 E1 traffic to be used with DVB S2 The Q Flex therefore provides a painless migration path to newer more efficient communications technology while fully supporting legacy services FastLink Low Density Parity Check LDPC Forward Error Correction FEC combines high coding gain with low latency FastLink can therefore be used to replace both conventional LDPC which has high latency and Turbo Product Code FEC which has a lower coding gain Paired Carrier allows space segment reuse It overlays transmit and receive carriers in the same space segment reducing satellite bandwidth requirements by up to 50 It can be used at the same tim
184. ions e Station Clock This controls the station clock which replaces the internal 10MHz clock reference allowing a number of modems to share a common clock source e SAF This allows the entry of Software Activated Feature SAF codes that enable modem feature activation in the field Upgrade This allows the modem software to be upgraded e Miscellaneous This allows the date and time to be set on the modem as well as allowing a modem to be reset without having to power it down 6 2 6 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C Screen The Edit gt Unit gt M amp C screen is shown in Figure 6 9 Paired Carrier Redundancy Station Clock SA Miscellaneous HTTPS Control Modem control Local remote Y Admin User New password New password confirmation Update Password Update Password RADIUS AAA Server IP address 10 0 0 10 Fallback server 1P 0 0 0 0 address Shared secret paradise Authentication validity 150 minutes Server timeout 5 seconds Use RADIUS AAA Interface Remote M amp C interface R5232 v RS485 address H Baud rate 9600 baud Y Modem Identity Modem identifier Q Flex Figure 6 9 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C Screen The Edit gt Unit gt M amp C screen is split into several sections as described in the following sections 6 28 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 6 1 Modem Control and Passwords Table 6 33 shows the Modem contro options for user control of the modem
185. irable to do it all the time This problem does not arise when only a single IP traffic port is available on the modem 6 60 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 3 4 Point to multipoint Mode The modem can be used in a point to multipoint mode where the hub modem sends a shared outbound to several remotes The inbounds from the remotes are processed by individual demodulators Hub Sets up a modem at the hub to be part of a point to multipoint system All modems at the hub site even if configured for Rx operation only should be set to this mode or one of the other hub modes described below Remote Sets up a modem at a remote site to work point to multipoint All remote modems that form part of a point to multipoint system should be set to this mode or one of the other remote modes described below Hub TCP acceleration This enables point to multipoint TCP acceleration The hub Tx modem should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled on this modem Note that hub Rx only modems in a point to multipoint TCP acceleration system should be set to Hub mode not Hub TCP Acceleration and that the Rx only modems should have VLAN filtering disabled Remote TCP acceleration For remote modems this enables point to multipoint TCP acceleration All remote modems should be set to this mode and VLAN filtering should also be enabled Hub Bridged TCP acceleration T
186. is if possible The modem allocates private IP addresses to the two ends of the ESC link no user address set up is required The ESC channel in IP mode has some sophisticated M amp C modes as described in the following list in all cases IP packets destined for the remote network continue to be bridged over the ESC e Paradise Univeral Protocol PUP commands can be sent to the modem with an esc prefix to force them to be sent over the ESC to the far modem e g esc get RxRemoteEbNo e f you don t want packets to be indiscriminately forwarded over the ESC then you can take the M amp C port out of the bridge meaning that packets on the M amp C port will not normally then go any further than the local modem You can then force chosen packets to be forwarded over the ESC if you want Forwarding is controlled by the Remote M amp C interface setting Setting this to P Forward to remote causes the modem to process TCP packets sent to ports 6703 and 6704 in a special way o Packets sent to port 6703 are forwarded over the ESC to port 6703 on the remote modem At the remote modem with the remote M amp C interface mode set to IP Remote Rem M amp C the payloads of packets received over the ESC on port 6703 are forwarded out of the serial RS485 M amp C interface i e converted from IP to serial commands o Packets sent to port 6704 are forwarded over the ESC to port 6701 on the remote modem At the remo
187. ite IP Address amp Subnet Mask 6 53 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 11 IP Encapsulation Type MPE This selects Multi Protocol Encapsulation MPE as the protocol for encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames for transmission over satellite when using DVB S2 This protocol is widely supported and is therefore useful for interoperability It adds an overhead of around 10 ULE This selects Unidirectional Lightweight Encapsulation ULE as the protocol for encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames for transmission over satellite when using DVB S2 It adds an overhead of around 5 to 7 PXE This selects proprietary Paradise XStream Encapsulation PXE as the protocol for encapsulating IP packets and Ethernet frames for transmission over satellite when using DVB S2 It adds an overhead of around 2 Table 6 57 DVB S2 IP Encapsulation Type 6 2 2 12 Encapsulation PID Range O to 8190 step size 1 Description When encapsulating Ethernet frames or IP packets into MPEG2 packets as part of a DVB S2 IP service this specifies the Packet ID PID value to be entered into the MPEG2 packets that are being created Note that the value is in decimal not hexadecimal The PID can then be used for filtering MPEG2 packets on the receive side The encapsulation PID must be left at its default value of 970 if DVB S2 AUPC or DVB S2 ACM is being used
188. ive Eb No is lower than the user defined threshold e Buffer slips are more frequent than the user defined threshold e A backward alarm is being received from either the satellite or terrestrial ports Async ESC Connector This is a 15 pin D type female connector It provides an RS232 RS422 RS485 asynchronous port for either a high rate Async Engineering Service Channel ESC facility for IBS or Closed Network plus ESC services or the IBS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility which is configured as the Aux channel on the modem When the IDR option is fitted separate ports for the ESC and Aux channels on the IDR card replace the ESC and Aux functions on the Async ESC connector which are disabled The Async ESC connector also provides an RS422 compatible Station Clock input Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook On line LED This LED mirrors the front panel Tx Carrier LED allowing the operator from the rear of the modem to ascertain the carrier status and to identify which modem in a 1 1 redundant pair is offline Optional Terrestrial Interface Positions There are four terrestrial interface positions that can be fitted with a variety of interface cards including ElA 530 G 703 Quad E1 Quad ASI LVDS HSSI and STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet The G 703 interface card supports T1 E1 T2 E2 T3 and E3 data rates Balanced operation is provided on two RJ45 connectors while unbalanced operation is via two B
189. k or are not data transparent then e Ensure there is no spectral inversion in the RF chain If there is then this must be corrected by re inverting it for Paired Carrier operation to work e Check the modem satellite location information or round trip time that has been set in each modem The range entered for the round trip time must cover the actual distance to the satellite Try widening out the round trip delay to ensure that it definitely covers the actual time delay to satellite Try switching from location to round trip delay or vice versa e Switch Paired Carrier off and on again in each modem to counter the possibility of a false lock e f this does not work then switch the carrier off and on again in each modem e Check the receive signal level and Eb No are correct e Check the spectrum and constellation for signs of signal degradation such as noise or interference e Otherwise check the general modem settings for correct configuration and overlap of the two carriers note that there are restrictions on the supported level of power asymmetry and symbol rate asymmetry If the modems take a long time to lock then 6 70 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e Narrow the difference between the minimum and maximum round trip delay times if these are being used to minimise the uncertainty in the range to the satellite via the Round trip delay setting on the Edit gt Paired Carrier menu This has a
190. ked questions about Paired Carrier operation along with answers are provided below Q Does Paired Carrier require a particular modulation or FEC configuration A No Paired Carrier imposes no special parameter limitations on the carriers involved However sometimes it is advantageous to use the bandwidth savings to switch to a more robust modulation and coding scheme but this is application dependent Q Can Paired Carrier handle multiple transmit and receive carriers A No the separate Paradise PCMA 70 Satellite Bandwidth Extender should be used if you require to cancel multiple carriers appearing within the cancellation bandwidth Q Can Paired Carrier handle asymmetric carriers that is carriers with different data rates and or different symbol rates on transmit and receive A Yes the Paired Carrier can handle asymmetric carriers Q My transmit and receive carrier levels off satellite are different can still use the Paired Carrier satellite signal canceller A Yes however the wanted and unwanted signal levels power spectral density should normally be within 10dB of each other Symbol rate asymmetry of up to 12 1 is supported It is sometimes possible to relax these conditions subject to the constraints of an overall detailed link budget analysis Power asymmetry must be kept between 10 to 10dB using the equation Power ratio dB Near PSD Far PSD 10log Near symbol rate Far symbol rate
191. l supported modulations Includes XStream IP DVB S2 DVB S2X CCM Rx S2XR Enables DVB S2X Rx operation for all supported modulations Includes XStream IP DVB S2 DVB S2 Tx DVB2T Enables DVB S2 Tx operation for all supported modulations Includes SmartLink and XStream IP DVB S2 DVB S2 Rx DVB2R Enables DVB S2 Rx operation for all supported modulations Includes SmartLink and XStream IP DVB S2 DVB S2X Low latency Mode S2XLL Enables the following proprietary extensions to DVB S2X e Very Short Frame Frame size of 5 400 bits reducing latency to 33 of standard DVB S2 Short frame supports QPSK 8PSK 16APSK 32APSK 2 5 7 15 8 15 3 5 2 3 11 15 4 5 13 15 14 15 e Ultra Short Frame Frame size of 3 240 bits reducing latency to 20 of standard DVB S2 Short frame supports QPSK 8PSK 16APSK 32APSK 1 3 4 9 5 9 2 3 7 9 8 9 ClearLinQ Tx Predistorter Adaptive CLNQ Corrects for linear and non linear distortion in the RF chain Applicable to all FECs and modulations including DVB S2X FastLink and TPC FastLink LDPC FL Enables FastLink low latency LDPC to the prevailing data rate of the modem subject to maximum data rate of 100Mbps Includes all relevant modulations and FEC rates Paired CarrierTM 56kbps to 256kbps PCMZ Enables Paired Carrier data rates in the given range inclusive Incorporates ViaSats patented PCMA technology
192. lar to that for 1 1 operation 7 4 Software Activated Features While some modem functions are available as plug in option cards the majority of additional functions are made available through Software Activated Feature SAF support As the name implies these are modem features that can be enabled by entering a feature code via any of the modem s user interfaces Feature codes are encrypted 7 12 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook codes issued by Teledyne Paradise Datacom uniquely associated with individual modems To allow evaluation of modem features all of the SAF features of the modem that it is capable of supporting can be activated for a 10 day period by entering a feature code of 0 This is referred to as Demonstration Mode Demonstration Mode can be activated up to three times after which any further attempts to use it will be rejected Note that it is not necessary to wait for Demonstration Mode to time out before reactivating it it can be activated twice to give a 20 day demonstration period and three times to give 30 days The user will be alerted shortly before the demonstration period times out As well as allowing feature evaluation Demonstration Mode can be used to test compatibility with other equipment and allows rapid substitution of equipment in a crisis To enable one or more features permanently referred to as Permanent Mode a modem specific feature code needs to be obtained from Teled
193. larm 2 4 forced okay o Backward alarm 1 4 internal ESC interface type This specifies which of the modem s physical interfaces is to be connected through to the satellite ESC channel This is described under the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead Closed screen description Aux interface type This specifies the Aux electrical interface The relevant physical interface on the shared Async ESC Aux port on the base modem or the separate Aux port on the IDR card is directly connected through to the ESC channel This interface on the modem provides the IBS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility The ESC and Aux functions are mutually exclusive unless an IDR card is fitted If an IDR card is fitted then the Aux port can provide 32kbps or 64kbps access to the IDR overhead in place of one or both of the IDR 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channels or it can provide either the IBS low rate Intelsat oversampled ESC facility or a higher rate synchronous channel within the IBS overhead 13 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 13 5 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced Drop and Insert Screens The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced screen will show options as displayed in Figure 13 5 and Figure 13 6 when G 703 or Quad El is selected as the terrestrial interface type These allow the selection of timeslots for transmission and reception They allow the association of specific terrestrial timeslots with satellite timeslots Tx Rx Memories Pair
194. larm has been detected at the Rx bearer input This indicates that equipment downstream of the receive path has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the modem Rx output failing Check the modem Rx path indicates OK and that the Rx data output from the modem is connected to the downstream equipment This indicates that the received signal has degraded resulting in a potentially unacceptable number of errors EE GE E EE fT E Rx warning Wanted Rx input power out of range Indicates that the wanted signal is very low or very high M Rx warning Composite Rx input power out of range Indicates very Indicates very high level of composite power level Indicates very high level of composite power composite power Rx warning Composite to wanted power level ratio gt 37dBc Rx warning LinkGuard interfererence over threshold Rx warning Rx failed LDPC BCH decoding Indicates very high level of composite to wanted power III A source of interference has been detected underneath the receive carrier that exceeds the alarm threshold set by the user This may be degrading the received signal and should be investigated and reported to the satellite operator The receiver was unable to decode the demodulated LDPC carrier successfully This indicates either that the satellite data has become corrupted or that there is a configuration incompatibility between the
195. late Paradise Universal Protocol PUP commands used Once enabled the modem will always respond to SNMP commands regardless of whether it has been placed in a mode that restricts user control to the front panel only f SNMP is disabled by default and must be enabled before it can be When using the M amp C interface an M amp C IP address including subnet mask and default gateway must be set An IP traffic address is not required when operating in Ethernet bridging modes IP addresses are described in Section 7 8 2 e Station Clock This is a 750 BNC female connector that accepts a 1MHz to 10MHz signal either a square wave of gt 1V peak to peak or a sine wave at a power level of OdBm or greater Alternatively the station clock signal can be input as an RS422 signal on the Async ESC connector The station clock acts as a clock for either the modem receive circuit or if the input is at exactly 10MHz for both the receive and transmit circuits It is therefore possible to maintain clock synchronization between several modems by feeding a common master clock signal into all of them 5 14 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter6 User Interfaces 6 1 User Control The modem has both front panel and web browser user interfaces For remote web browsing there are two fixed user names namely admin and user The admin user can view and change the modem configuration while user can only view the mo
196. lays one of the following o Normal the carrier is on o Mute Ev the carrier is muted due to an alarm detected by the modem hardware o Mute Ter the carrier is muted due to either the terrestrial Tx RTS pin being active this is an input signal that can be used to mute the carrier under external control as required or some other problem being experienced with the terrestrial interface o Mute 1 1 the carrier is muted due to being the Standby modem in a 1 1 redundancy system o Mute Brk the carrier is muted following a power outage o Mute Flf the carrier is muted due to an alarm detected by the modem software o Mute Cfg the carrier is muted due to the modem being in the process of reconfiguring o Mute Off the carrier has been muted by the user IP Tx buffer fill status This is displayed when the IP terrestrial interface is selected and shows as a percentage how full the modem s transmit buffer towards satellite is 6 2 2 2 Status Demodulator The Traffic section of the Status screen is continually updated with the following information e Receive Es No i e energy per symbol to spectral noise density ratio e Receive Eb No i e the energy per bit to spectral noise density ratio e Receive power level i e the level of the wanted signal e Receive composite power level i e all of the power in the receive channel consisting of both wanted and unwanted signal Receive frequency offset This
197. llite as required Bridging Not bridged On M amp C port has IP Traffic address dedicated address not used IP Traffic M amp C traffic will not port dedicated to be bridged over satellite traffic only satellite modem which will be gateway is applied accelerated and to M amp C subnet bridged over satellite as required Routing Bridged Off This combination of modem settings is illegal M amp C port will be automatically removed from bridge Routing Bridged On This combination of modem settings is illegal M amp C port will be automatically removed from bridge Routing Not bridged Off M amp C port has IP Traffic port has dedicated address dedicated address which must be ona_ traffic will be different subnet to routed over IP Traffic port M amp C satellite as traffic will be routed required over satellite as required Modem gateway applied to either port as specified by subnet Routing Not bridged On M amp C port has IP Traffic port has dedicated address dedicated address which must be ona_ traffic will be different subnet to routed and IP Traffic port M amp C accelerated over traffic will be routed satellite as and accelerated required over satellite as required Modem gateway applied to either port as specified by subnet Table 6 51 Ethernet Port Operation 6 48 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 2 2 Bridge M amp C This is an On Off control that determines whether th
198. llite modem is designed for both open and closed network operation in fixed and mobile environments providing a data link between geographically distant sites via satellite Features include DVB S2 EN 302 307 1 and DVB S2X EN 302 307 2 operation including Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM mode IF frequency ranges of 50 to 90MHz and 100 to 180MHz L band frequency range of 950MHz to 2050MHz optionally to 2150MHz Open network Intelsat IBS to IESS 309 and IESS 310 and Intelsat IDR to IESS 308 and IESS 310 plus Eutelsat SMS to EESS 501 Closed network modes G 703 E1 operation including Drop and Insert D amp I via T1 D4 T1 ESF and G 732 bearer types Variable data rate between 4 8kbps and 160Mbps BPSK QPSK Offset QPSK 8PSK 8QAM 16QAM 16APSK 32APSK and 64QAM modulation schemes Forward Error Correction FEC options of Turbo Product Code TPC FastLink low latency Low Density Parity Code LDPC and DVB S2 as well as legacy FECs Spectral roll off factors of 5 10 15 20 25 and 35 A full range of terrestrial interfaces including Internet Protocol IP RS422 V 35 RS232 LVDS HSSI STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet and G 703 T1 E1 T2 E2 and T3 E3 The Quad El interface card multiplexes four E1 interfaces together onto a single carrier and also serial data G 703 and IP traffic to be multiplexed together onto a single carrier Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC automatically adjusts modem output power to
199. llow configurations to be shared between different modems The following operations can be performed on configuration memories e Store This allows the current M amp C configuration to be stored to a named configuration memory for later use Up to 20 configuration memories can be created more may be stored if memory allows The memories are non volatile and will persist between successive power ups of the modem Configuration memories can be assigned any desired name using the alphanumeric keypad 6 73 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e Recall This allows a previously stored configuration to be selected and used in place of the current configuration e Erase This allows configuration memories to be deleted e Download This is used to download one or more configuration memories from the modem to a PC or equivalent e Upload This is used to upload one or more configuration memories to the modem A default configuration memory called LOAD_DEFAULTS always exists Recalling it will reset the modem to its factory defaults When LOAD_DEFAULTS is recalled from the web user interface then the modem s current M amp C IP address netmask gateway takeaway control Modem ID and passwords are all retained whereas when selected from the front panel these go back to their factory defaults This is done in order not to lose remote control of the modem from the web user interface when using it LOAD_DEFAULTS cannot
200. lows the use of only one of these channels at a time and then only in an Async mode there is no clock signal on this port If both ESC and Aux channels are to be used together or either channel used in a synchronous mode then the IDR option must be fitted which provides separate ESC amp Aux ports both with clock data and octet lines When the IDR option is fitted the shared ESC Aux port on the Async ESC connector is DISABLED When configured for different services the ESC and Aux channels provide as follows 10 4 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook e In Closed Net Plus ESC mode the ESC channel provides the variable rate async ESC facility the Aux channel is not used e In IBS SMS modes the ESC channel provides the High Rate Async ESC facility 2400 Baud at 64kbps and the Aux channel either the Intelsat low rate ESC facility 50 Baud at 64kbps or a variable rate synchronous Aux circuit However to use the Aux channel in a synchronous mode the IDR option must be fitted Without the IDR option that has separate ports for ESC amp Aux channels both ESC and Aux channels ie high rate async ESC amp Intelsat low rate ESC cannot be used simultaneously e In IDR Mode this port is not used as when the IDR option is fitted separate ESC and Aux ports on the IDR card replace this shared ESC Aux port Refer to the definitions of the ESC amp Aux ports on the 50 way IDR ESC Aux Backward Alarm connector on the following few
201. maintain a constant Eb No at the distant end of the satellite link Front panel display and keypad for local control Remote equipment can be controlled over the satellite via serial or IP traffic interfaces Remote modem control is supported via web browsing the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Telnet and the proprietary Paradise Universal Protocol PUP command protocol As well as supporting the development of third party user interfaces for modem control the PUP protocol includes many useful hooks for satellite listening applications such as the output of and Q baseband samples Compact 1U chassis 405mm deep XStream IP providing an advanced integrated suite of IP optimisation and traffic management features These include Transport Control Protocol TCP acceleration header and payload compression encryption static and dynamic routing Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP IEEE 802 1p Quality of Service QoS support IEEE 802 1q VLAN support traffic shaping and Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM A dual IPv4 IPv6 TCP IP stack is provided IPv4 support is provided for all IP functions as the default With respect to IPv6 bridging and routing are supported along with an IPv6 embedded web server Modem IP 5 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook addresses and static routes can also be entered and displayed in IPv6 format TCP acceleration is supported at up to the maximum data rate for the mod
202. male D type ElA 530 maximum 10Mbps RS232 max 100kbps G 703 balanced on RJ45 G 703 unbalanced on BNC female 750 STM 1 OC 3 Optical Ethernet on small form factor pluggable module LVDS 25 pin female D type HSSI 50 pin SCSI 2 type connector Quad E1 four balanced G 703 on RJ45 connectors User Traffic Data Rate 4 8kbps to 2Mbps Extends base operation to 5Mbps Extends 5Mbps to 10Mbps Extends 10Mbps to 25Mbps Extends 25Mbps to 60Mbps Extends 60Mbps to 100Mbps Extends 100Mbps to 160Mbps Extensions are cumulative User Traffic Data Rate Resolution 1bps Note The combination of FEC rate modulation scheme and satellite overhead limits the traffic data rate range in all modes User Data Rate Range Closed Network 4 8kbps 9 6ksps to 100Mbps 40Msps User Data Rate Range Closed Network Plus ESC As Closed Network except limits inclusive of overhead of approximately 1 4 times the ESC baud rate Supports ESC rate from 110bps to 115kbps DVB S2 DVB S2X 350kbps 350ksps to 132Mbps 37 5Msps 100kbps 100ksps to 160Mbps 50Msps User Data Rate Range IBS 4 8kbps to 10Mbps 6 7 satellite overhead added User Data Rate Range IDR 4 8kbps to 10Mbps 96k overhead added resolution of 8k limitation of frame structure Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Audio Channels Option Used with IBS and IDR to provide 2 x 32kbps audio ADPCM coded channels
203. mation when a BUC is being controlled from the modem BUC output This is the output power in dBm at the waveguide flange or Off when the BUC is not transmitting BUC temperature This shows the temperature in degrees Centigrade reported by the BUC BUC class This shows the BUC power class in Watts BUC current When a BUC PSU is fitted then this shows the BUC current level in Amperes LNB voltage When an LNB is fitted then this shows the LNB voltage in Volts LNB current When an LNB is fitted then this shows the LNB current in milli Amperes All of the BUC status other than BUC current requires a communications link to exist between the modem and the BUC BUC and LNB under and over current alarms can be controlled via the Edit gt Unit gt Alarms screen Note that only Q Flex modems produced from the second half of 2014 onwards support the LNB current monitor function 6 2 3 Edit Screen The Edit screen contains the following tab menu options Tx Rx These menus allow setup of the modem transmit and receive paths 6 8 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Unit These menus contain all of the general modem configuration settings including the terrestrial interface monitor and control alarms station clock and Software Activated Features SAF settings They also include a software upgrade factility IP This menu allows setup of the IP traffic interface e Paired Carrier This menu allows the set
204. me Table 6 18 DVB S2 Tx Rx Frame Size 6 2 5 3 Sweep Mode Normal In this mode the sweep width is controlled automatically by the modem The default sweep width used by the modem is 20kHz Other This mode allows the user to set the sweep width in order to compensate for carrier frequency uncertainty introduced in either the ground equipment or in the space segment due to for example frequency conversion errors At very low data rates reducing the sweep width may speed up carrier acquisition Table 6 19 Sweep Mode 6 2 5 4 Sweep Width Range 1kHz to 250kHz step size 1kHz Description Controls the Rx signal sweep width when the Sweep mode is set to Other This is a setting i e the total width is twice the value that is entered The default sweep width used by the modem is 20kHz Table 6 20 Sweep Width 6 2 5 5 Acknowledge Power Break If the Modem carrier setting on the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service menu is set to On mute if power break the any power outage must be explicitly acknowledged using this control thereby confirming that it is okay to restart transmission following the outage 6 21 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 5 6 Reed Solomon FEC Options When using Viterbi and Trellis Coded Modulation TCM Reed Solomon options will become available on the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service gt Advanced menu These allow Reed Solo
205. ments the digit highlighted by the cursor The Down arrow key is also used to enter a comma when entering a number of values together such as when entering a list of timeslots The Left arrow key moves the cursor to the left both on menus and when entering alphanumeric values The Left arrow key has a special function when viewing the system log where it is used to move backwards in the log by 100 entries The Right arrow key moves the cursor to the right both on menus and when entering alphanumeric values The Right arrow key has a special function when viewing the system log where it is used to move forwards in the log by 100 entries When entrying alphanumeric values pressing the O key and the Right arrow key together deletes the character at the cursor MAIN Key The MAIN key returns the user to the MA N menu from anywhere in the menu hierarchy 6 93 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook ENTER Key On a menu the ENTER key is used to navigate to the submenu highlighted by the cursor When entering or selecting a new value the ENTER key is used to accept the new value and a further press of the ENTER key is generally required to move to the next screen Note that when a new value is accepted it is applied to the modem hardware immediately BACK Key On a menu the BACK key is used to navigate to the previous screen When entering or selecting a new value the BACK key is used to cancel any change to
206. modcod change occurs It is therefore strongly recommended to use the modem s internal traffic shaping feature in conjunction with ACM Note that ACM works to the full symbol rate of the modem ACM menu on off options are accessible once DVB S2 is selected as the Tx or Rx service see the Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service screen ACM status can be viewed from the Status screen ACM is built into the modem and does not require the use of a separate controller box ACM is compatible with the use of Paradise s Paired Carrier allowing both carriers to use the same space segment further reducing bandwidth requirements 7 33 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 9 DVB S2 and SmartLink The Q FlexTM modem supports SCPC DVB S2 and combined SCPC DVB S2 operation The DVB S2 standard was approved by ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute in November of 2006 The new standard incorporates the latest technology in order to provide greater spectral efficiency and improved stability using high order modulation schemes and more powerful FEC coding It is a common misconception that DVB S2 is a standard for the broadcast of video but this is incorrect as the standard is essentially data agnostic DVB S2 allows for both continuous data streams such as those provided by G 703 HSSI and ElA530 interfaces and packetised data such as IP and MPEG video The space segment savings of DVB S2 can therefore be obta
207. modem fault Tx fault CRC sync loss The modem only seeks Cyclic Redundancy Code CRC on Tx input sync when the Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in G 732 mode or 2048k IBS G 732 0 overhead mode and when set by the user to process CRC s If CRC sync is permanently lost check if a CRC is present on the PCM signal Tx fault Input BER gt 1E The Bit Error Rate at the Tx input measured on the PCM 3 Frame Alignment Words is worse than 1x10 This can only be due to a very poor error rate on the PCM input signal Tx fault TS16 MF sync The modem only seeks TS16 Multiframe sync when the lost on Tx input Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in a G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected or 2048k IBS G 732 0 overhead mode with CAS is enabled Check that a CAS multiframe is present on the PCM signal applied to the modem Tx fault Frame sync lost Frame sync has been lost on the terrestrial input Only on Tx input Check bearer displayed when using the drop mux Check the bearer type and AIS type has been correctly configured If the AIS detectors are disabled check equipment generating bearer is not generating AIS Tx fault Frame sync lost Frame sync has been lost on one or more of the Quad E1 on ports 1 to 4 card terrestrial inputs Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook FaultText Notes Relays To Sat The current drawn by the BUC has exceeded the outside limits permiss
208. modem will attempt to maintain the remote Eb No at the remote specified target level It requires a bidirectional ESC channel to be set up Eb No Table 6 21 AUPC Mode Typically the local controlling modem is placed in Maintain mode and the remote modem is placed in Monitor mode unless it is also controlling another modem via AUPC in which case it will also be placed in Maintain mode 6 2 3 2 Target Remote Eb No Range 0 1dB to 14 9dB step size 0 1dB Description This is the remote Eb No that AUPC tries to maintain by adjusting the Tx power level Table 6 22 Target Remote Eb No 6 2 3 3 Maximum AUPC Power Offset Range OdBm to 25 0dBm step size 0 1dBm Description This is the maximum increase in Tx power level that AUPC is allowed to make in order to maintain remote Eb No Table 6 23 Maximum AUPC Power Offset 6 23 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 3 4 Maximum Negative AUPC Power Offset Range OdBm to 25 0dBm step size 0 1dBm Description This is the maximum decrease in Tx power level that AUPC is allowed to make in order to maintain remote Eb No Table 6 24 Maximum Negative AUPC Power Offset 6 2 3 5 AUPC Method Normal This should be selected when Q Series Quantum or Evolution modems are being used at either end of the satellite link Self In this mode the modem will adjust power output
209. mon to be switched on off in transmit and receive Reed Solomon is an outer codec that can be used to correct errors remaining from the Viterbi and TCM inner FECs 6 2 1 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Advanced Timeslot Screens Timeslot configuration of G 703 and Quad E1 interfaces is described in Chapter 13 6 2 2 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing Screen Framing is described in Chapter 13 6 2 3 Edit gt Tx Rx gt AUPC Screen The Edit gt Unit gt AUPC screen is shown in Figure 6 7 Tx Rx Paired Carrier Memories Redundancy Service aupc EM Tx AUPC mode Maintain remote Eb No Target remote Eb No 0 0 dB Maximum AUPC power offset h o dBm Maximum negative AUPC power h 0 dBm offset 1 AUPC method Normal Y Carrier loss action Set to max v Local demod unlocked action Off v Figure 6 7 Edit gt Tx Rx gt AUPC Screen Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC is described in Section 7 2 It provides a method of overcoming rain fade in order to maintain a constant carrier to noise level lt does this by 6 22 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook attempting to maintain the remote Eb No at a specified target level by varying the local modem transmit power level 6 2 3 1 AUPC Mode Off The AUPC function is switched off Monitor In this mode the modem will monitor the Eb No of the remote modem via remote the ESC without making any changes to the Tx power level Eb No Maintain In this mode the
210. mption fully loaded is approx 105W Earth leakage current is approx 2mA 250V Modem Standard unaccelerated Throughput depends on traffic format formats such as UDP that do not require acknowledgements run at up to the maximum data rate of the modem unaccelerated TCP which requires acknowledgements will typically run at up to 128kbps per connection 80 Connections Sec 12 16 BUC LNB facilities Parameter Modem BUC Power Supply Options Mains input 48V DC 2A output 100W to BUC via Tx IFL Mains input 24V DC 4A output 100W to BUC via Tx IFL Mains input 48V DC 3 5A output 200W to BUC via Tx IFL Mains input 24V DC 6A output 200W to BUC viaTx IFL 48V DC input 48V DC 3 5A output 180W to BUC via Tx IFL 48V DC input 24V DC 6A output 180W to BUC viaTx IFL LNB Power 13 15 18 24V 0 5A DC to LNB via Rx IFL standard FSK Control Option Requires a BUC Power Supply to be fitted Allows monitor amp control of a compatible BUC from the Modem via the IFL 10MHz Reference via IFL Option 10MHz may be provided via the Tx IFL to the BUC and via the Rx IFL to the LNB Stability is 5x10 yr Level 12 13 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 17 Performance Graphs For FastLink low latency LDPC BER curves please see separate datasheet on the Teledyne Paradise Datacom web site at http www paradisedata com 12 14 Q Flex Satelli
211. n an emergency the equipment should be installed near the mains socket outlet which should be easily accessible 3 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 3 2 Environmental Compliance All Teledyne Paradise Datacom satellite modem products are compliant with the following EC environmental directives e The Reduction of Hazardous Substances RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU e The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2012 19 EU The equipment is designed to operate in a static 19 inch rack system conforming to IEC 297 2 The equipment should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications Network Operation of the equipment in an environment other than that stated will invalidate the safety standards The equipment must not be operated in an environment in which it is exposed to Unpressurised altitudes greater than 3000 metres Extreme temperatures outside the stated operating range Excessive dust Moisture or humid atmosphere above 95 relative humidity Excessive vibration e Flammable gases e Corrosive or explosive atmosphere A 3 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 3 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Compliance This satellite modem conforms to the provisions of EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and complies with the following EC and FCC standards e Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class B Information Technology Equipment R
212. n and Operating Handbook i FEC Rate Min Data Max Data Modulation FEC de facto Rate kbps Rate Mbps BPSK VIT SEQ 1 2 4 8 15 2 BPSK VIT SEQ 3 4 7 2 PIS 2 BPSK VIT SEQ 7 8 8 4 26 2 2 BPSK VIT RS 1 2 4 3 883 BPSK VIT RS 3 4 6 4 20 BPSK VIT RS 7 8 7 5 2888 O QPSK VIT SEQ 1 2 9 6 30 2 O QPSK VIT SEQ 3 4 14 4 45 2 O QPSK VIT SEQ 7 8 16 8 5252 O QPSK VIT RS 1 2 8 6 26 67 O QPSK VIT RS 3 4 12 8 40 O QPSK VIT RS 7 8 15 46 67 O QPSK TPC 1 2 9 6 29 56 O QPSK TPC 3 4 14 4 45 O QPSK TPC 7 8 16 8 525 O QPSK TPC 0 93 17 9 52 74 8PSK TCM 2 3 19 2 60 8PSK TCM RS 2 3 17 7 55 07 8PSK TPC 3 4 21 6 60 8PSK TPC 7 8 25 2 60 8PSK TPC 0 93 26 8 60 16QAM TPC 3 4 28 8 60 16QAM TPC 7 8 33 6 60 16QAM TPC 0 93 35 8 60 DVB S2 QPSK 1 4 50 10 90 DVB S2 QPSK 1 3 65 7 18 77 DVB S2 QPSK 2 5 79 22 70 DVB S2 QPSK 1 2 98 9 25 32 DVB S2 QPSK 3 5 118 9 34 51 DVB S2 QPSK 2 3 132 3 38 44 DVB S2 QPSK 3 4 148 8 42 38 DVB S2 QPSK 4 5 158 8 45 00 DVB S2 QPSK 5 6 165 5 47 62 DVB S2 QPSK 8 9 176 7 51 56 DVB S2 QPSK 9 10 178 9 53 37 DVB S2 8PSK 3 5 178 51 48 DVB S2 8PSK 2 3 198 1 57 35 DVB S2 8PSK 3 4 222 9 83 DVB S2 8PSK 5 6 247 9 90 DVB S2 8PSK 8 9 264 7 160 DVB S2 8PSK 9 10 268 160 DVB S2 16APSK 2 3 263 8 160 DVB S2 16APSK 3 4 296 7 160 DVB S2 16APSK 4 5 316 6 160 DVB S2 16APSK 5 6 330 1 160 DVB S2 16APSK 8 9 352
213. n set Tx clock Tx CIk In If there is no physical clock loop set the Tx clock Ax The end without the loop requires the buffer to be activated i e the Rx clock to be set to something other than Satellite The buffer size should be set to twice the Doppler shift This in turn depends on the the accuracy with which the satellite orbit is maintained As a 7 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook rule of thumb 2ms end to end buffering should be sufficient for one satellite hop and 4ms for a round trip where twice the Doppler shift is required Set the Tx and Rx clocks as follows When the clock is provided via the terrestrial interface Set Tx clock to Tx clk in and Rx clock to Tx clk in Modem internal clock This sets Rx clock to Internal and feeds the clock to the terrestrial equipment If the Rx output clock is internally or externally looped then set Tx clock to Tx Clk In If the Rx output clock is not returned to the modem Tx input then set Tx clock to Rx Clk Station clock When Rx clock is set to Station then set the Tx clock as for modem internal clock above Satellite This is an invalid Rx clock setting With a clock loop at the remotet end the Rx satellite clock is a copy of the Tx clock and cannot be looped again 7 1 3 2 No Clock Loop If there is no clock loop then both ends need the buffer to be enabled in order to cope with Doppler and the plesiochronous effect i e the difference between the
214. n the spreadsheed application e Within Excel highlight the A and B columns Select the Chart Wizard from the toolbar or alternatively select the nsert menu followed by Chart Select XY Scatter as the chart type Select the Scatter topmost sub chart type Select Next and then accept the defaults for Data Range and Series Add a chart title and X and Y titles as desired Select Finish and then resize the resulting graph as desired An example of the output is shown in Figure 6 13 6 36 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Constellation Se Figure 6 13 Example Constellation Graph Microsoft Excel 6 2 9 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C gt HTTPS Screen The Edit gt Unit gt M8 C gt HTTPS screen is shown in Figure 6 14 Paired Carrier Memories Redundancy Station Clock Upgrade Miscellaneous Alarms HTTPS Clicking this button will disable port 80 on the modem web server and all browser connections must be made using HTTPS protocol As part of this operation the web server will be re started and loss of communications with the browser may result Please wait for the browser to return to the home page at https 10 101 224 10 Figure 6 14 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C gt HTTPS Screen Secure HTTPS connections to the modem s web server on port 443 are always enabled However it is possible to disable and re enable standard HTTP reques
215. nables Ethernet TCP UDP IP and RTP packet header compression IP payload compression Enables TCP and UDP payload compression compliant to RFC 1951 DEFLATE Dynamic routing Enables choice of RIP V1 and V2 OSPF V2 and V3 and BGP V4 dynamic routing TCP acceleration Acceleration of TCP data over satellite to the prevailing data rate of the modem AAA RADIUS secure user login Authentication Authorisation amp Accounting Gives greater access control and accountability by replacing standard modem login with user s personal company network login credentials Encryption AES 256 bit key encryption of IP packets Note that encryption is export controlled technology and is provided on the Q FlexE model only Table 5 2 Software Activated Features continues over page 5 6 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Feature SAF Code Description XStream IP DVB S2 e P over DVB encapsulation Supports the transmission of IP packets with without Ethernet frames over DVB S2 DVB S2X using Multiprotocol Encapsulation MPE EN 301 192 Unidirectional Lightweight Encapsulation ULE RFC 4326 and Paradise XStream Encapsulation PXE e ACM Enables DVB S2 DVB S2X Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM e VCM Allows either two ASI streams or one ASI stream and one IP stream to be multiplexed onto a single carrier DVB S2X CCM Tx S2XT Enables DVB S2X Tx operation for al
216. ncy Range 0 0GHz to 99 999GHZ step size 0 0000001GHz i e 100Hz Description This is the LNB frequency used to receive from satellite If the LNB LO frequency has been set on the Edit gt Tx Rx gt BUC LNB menu then the L band receive frequency will no longer be available and will be automatically controlled by the modem to achieve the requested LNB receive frequency Table 6 14 LNB Carrier Frequency 6 2 4 14 Tx Rx Spectral Roll off The spectral roll off determines the slope of the carrier at its edges The supported roll off factors are listed in Table 6 15 Range 5 10 15 20 25 35 Description All spectral roll off factors are available for all FECs including DVB S2 and DVB S2X with the exception of the low cost version of DVB S2 which supports roll off factors down to and including 15 roll off A comparison of the different spectral roll offs including their effect on carrier power is provided in the document Saving Satellite Bandwidth by Optimising Spectal Roll off This is available from the White Papers section of the Paradise web site at http www paradisedata com Table 6 15 Tx Rx Spectral Roll off 6 18 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 4 15 Tx Rx Spectral Inversion Spectral inversion is an On Off control that controls whether the carrier and Q components are swapped or not allowing the modem to compensate for any other
217. nects to the other modem in the 1 1 pair via a 9 pin D type male connector A 1 1 redundancy system requires two modems a 1 1 control cable between the two redundancy connectors a Y cable for splitting the traffic path and passive splitters and combiners for the IF ports An overview of 1 1 operation is provided in Section 8 4 Remote M amp C Connector This is a 9 pin D type female connector The modem supports the Paradise Universal Protocol PUP as specified in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Flex Satellite Modem RS232 for direct to PC applications and RS485 for multidrop applications are supported The Remote M amp C interface can be connected to the remote modem s Async ESC interface allowing remote modem control over satellite Ethernet IP Traffic and Remote M amp C Connectors Two Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 connectors are provided for modem Monitor and Control M amp C and satellite traffic respectively Ethernet speed duplex and cable 5 13 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook termination crossover versus straight through are auto negotiated Line speed and duplex can also be set to fixed values The two Ethernet ports can be bridged together under software control MAC control can be via the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP an embedded web server that sends web pages to a web browser a Telnet style terminal emulation application or via TCP packets that encapsu
218. ning whenever H has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal 9 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RS or Device DTE Ready In line TR switch to the inactive state lt is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Edit gt Tx gt Carrier and selecting RTS enabled Q3705 HSSI Interface The HSSI interface is used as follows Signal Description i Electrical Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX Je PA ATA Cem E IC CI E eege EC IC II E MZ CEI CA A II E Int Tx Clock Out DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX v DCE Available COMMON LINES e ICO e IC e pe e ICA REESEN The modem can operate at high data rates using the HSSI interface but the maximum useable data rate is limited by the connecting cable length The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over a 10m cable over go
219. nk loss even in sudden deep fades Should the link be lost then the minimum modcod is automatically selected in order to re establish the link The transmitter can switch between any two modcods it does not have to go through them in sequence Since ACM can work all the way down to a negative Es No i e below what the link was designed for it effectively gives 100 link availability albeit at a reduced data rate 7 32 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Note that with DVB S2 ACM pilots are automatically switched on at operating points where their use achieves the maximum throughput for a particular Es No For example for an available Es No of 6 5dB it is better to use short block 8PSK 3 5 with pilots on spectral efficiency 1 69bits s Hz than to use the most suitable short block modcod with pilots off Le QPSK 5 6 spectral efficiency 1 6bits s Hz Pilots are sometimes viewed as causing an undesirable increase in overhead but it should be remembered that they also reduce the Es No at which the modem can lock this trade off means that optimal throughput is sometimes achieved only with the active use of pilots Note that ACM can be used with AUPC at the same time providing automatic uplink power control helps maintain the remote Eb No at the target level Modcod changes are totally transparent at the receiver it does not involve the demodulator having to reacquire the signal Modcod changes can be made ins
220. nt Eb No Buffer slip threshold DC current minimum DC current maximum DC alarm action CLOCK Station clock source Station clock use Station clock frequency SAF New SAF code entry End current test shot UPGRADE Upgrade modem software wia USB MISC Set modem time date 10MHz reference adjustment Figure 6 55 Front panel Edit gt Unit Menus 6 101 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 4 View Menu VIEW Unit SAF Monitor Alarms Log IP UNIT Model Serial number Software version Firmware version Hardware fitted SAF Features enabled Features not enabled Test time remaining Test shots remaining SAF mix code Temporary features enabled MONITOR Unit Temperature Loopback status PSU levels ALARMS All Tx Rx Unit LOG System log IP M amp C IP address Figure 6 56 Front panel View Menus 6 4 5 Test Menu TEST Loopback BER RF IP LOOPBACK Loopback test mode BER TEST Tx mode Tx channel Tx pattern Rx mode Rx channel Rx pattern Test results RF Modulator CW Modulator alternate 1 0 IP Simulated satellite delay Figure 6 57 Front panel Test Menus 6 102 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 7 Modem Concepts 7 1 System Clocking There are two terms commonly used when referring to the receive buffering namely Doppler and Plesiochronous Doppler Plesiochronous Receive Doppler buffering is required becau
221. nt drawn by the Rx LNB is outside the limit Both a minimum and a maximum current threshold can be set These set the current thresholds outside of which an alarm will be generated Table 6 46 LNB DC Current Minimum Maximum 6 2 11 Edit gt Unit gt Station Clock Screen The Edit gt Unit gt Station Clock screen is shown in Figure 6 16 DER unit Station Clock Miscellaneous Station Clock Station clock source Station clock frequency 10000 kHz Lock high stability oscillator to the station clock Figure 6 16 Edit gt Unit gt Station Clock Screen The station clock input is a way of providing a common clock to a number of modems in order to synchronize all satellite traffic to a master clock The modem s terrestrial interface clocking function both transmit and receive is slaved to the station clock input when it is active The station clock can be provided at any of a range of frequencies and does not need to be fixed at the precise data rate for the link 6 40 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook In addition the modem s internal high stability oscillator can be slaved to the station clock thereby ensuring its use in carrier and BUC LNB control Note that even when being used in the IF frequency bands the high stability oscillator normally regarded as an L band feature can still be slaved to the station clock The station clock frequency must be at one of a small number of fixed frequen
222. nted signal at the other end being reduced to a level comparable with system noise Paired Carrier is designed for use in point to point links For point to multipoint operation the Paradise PCMA 70 Satellite Bandwidth Extender can be used to overlay several smaller carriers on top of a larger carrier It then cancels the larger unwanted carrier before feeding the output to the individual demodulators responsible for processing each of the smaller carriers The PCMA 70 works with any network topology and any type of modem technology so long as the outbound is an SCPC carrier including star topology hub spoke one to many FDMA mesh single satellite hop 7 38 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook many to many hybrid star mesh Single Channel Per Carrier SCPC and Demand Assigned Multiple Access DAMA voice and data networks Paired Carrier helps in the case of bandwidth limited links However if a link is instead power limited then its design can be changed to turn it into a bandwidth limited link and then Paired Carrier can be used to improve the bandwidth utilisation Paired Carrier is waveform agnostic and will work with all modulation and FEC schemes It is used in addition to not instead of other bandwidth saving techniques Paired Carrier and DVB S2 represent two of the most bandwidth efficient technologies available today and can be used together in the Q Flex modem Some frequently as
223. o Access Level attribute or with an Access Level value that is not supported then the modem will default to administrator access being granted The full specification of this attribute of the Access Accept response is as follows a Type one byte value 0x1A indicates a vendor specific attribute b Length one byte value 0x09 indicates the entire vendor specific attribute field is nine bytes in length c Vendor ID four bytes OxOO00FC16 indicates Paradise private use d Vendor type one byte value 0x01 indicates the vendor specific attribute is Access Level e Vendor length one byte value 0x03 indicates the remainder of the vendor specific attribute field following the Vendor ID is three bytes in length f Vendor data one byte value 0 Modem Administrator value 1 Modem User indicates the authorised login access level 6 2 6 4 RADIUS Authentication Validity Range 5 to 60 minutes step size 1 minute Description Controls the period between automatic re authentication of the connection to the RADIUS server This is done in the background and no user intervention is necessary unless the connection to the RADIUS server has failed when the user may be prompted to log in again using the fallback RADIUS server or standard modem log in if no RADIUS server is available Table 6 35 RADIUS Authentication Validity 6 30 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and
224. o ESC overhead Less than 32kbps as per closed network V 35 scrambler up to 100Mbps IF Connector Type BNC female L band connector Type N type female IF Impedance 500 8 750 L band Impedance 500 IF Return Loss gt 18dB L band Return Loss gt 15dB Internal Frequency lt 1ppm yr Reference Ageing External Reference Clocking only 1 to 10MHz in 1kHz steps Clocking and RF frequency 10MHz 0dBm 1dB 12 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Parameter 12 2 Tx Modulator Specifications Modem IF Output Power Level 0 to 25dBm continuously variable in 0 1dB steps L band Output Power Level 0 to 40dBm continuously variable in 0 1dB steps Output Level Stability 0 3750B 0 C to 50 C Transmit Filtering Spectral roll off factors of 5 10 15 20 25 and 35 See the document Saving Satellite Bandwidth by Optimising Spectral Roll off document number AN_035 from the White Papers section of http www paradisedata com for more details including occupied bandwith calculations Occupied Bandwidth See referenced document AN_035 above Recommended Channel Spacing See referenced document AN_035 above Phase Accuracy 22 maximum Amplitude Accuracy 0 2dB maximum Carrier Suppression 30dBc minimum Output Phase Noise As IESS 308 nominally 3dB better Also complies with IESS 316 IF Output Frequ
225. o prove that the change has been accepted The response indicates a value of 20 get TIFTx FPwr 02 15 01 09 67 65 74 20 54 49 46 54 78 49 46 50 77 72 2A OB 03 2 0 02 0A 01 09 2D 32 30 2A C3 03 8 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 9 Data Interfaces The modem provides Ethernet IP interfaces as standard plus options for LVDS ElA530 RS422 V 35 and RS232 IDR HSSI G 703 balanced and unbalanced Quad El IP traffic and Eurocom D1 interfaces There are four data interface positions on the modem The P3722 G 703 option card supports E1 T1 E2 T2 E3 T3 data rates Both balanced RJ45 and and unbalanced BNC connectors are available The P3721 IDR option must be fitted in an upper interface position 1 1 Redundancy Operation The G 703 interface needs to be specifically configured for 1 1 operation The 1 1 G 703 mode controls what happens when power is removed If the power is lost in Normal mode then the G 703 input and output are joined in order to ensure that if the G 703 signal is looped through multiple equipment then the other traffic is not affected by a break in the G 703 line If the power is lost in 7 7 mode then the G 703 output goes high impedance allowing the online modem in the 1 1 pair to carry the traffic Y cables are normally used with the terrestrial interfaces The IP interface requires separate but parallel connections to the network IP 1 1 Modem Redundancy Conne
226. od quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles e g 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc Similarly the maximum data rate increases as the connecting cable length is reduced i e 20Mbps to 5m 40Mbps to 2 5m 9 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever H has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that there is a clocking problem external to the modem i e changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal All signals are balanced differentially driven and received at standard ECL levels The loopbacks LA and LB provided are direct supersets of the EIA signals LL Local Loopback and RL Remote Loopback Loopback LC is an optional request signal from DCE to DTE to request that the DTE provides a loopback path to the DCE By selecting Advanced it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RS or Device DTE Ready In line TR switc
227. odcod modcod is the term used to describe the combination of modulation and FEC rate Transmit modcod This is the current transmit modulation and FEC rate which vary with remote Es No 6 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Receive data rate This is the instantaneous receive data rate which varies with modcod Receive modcod This is the current receive modulation and FEC rate which the remote modem varies in accordance with the Es No being received by the local modem ACM operation is described in Section 7 8 13 6 2 2 5 Status AUPC The Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC section of the Status screen is displayed and continually updated with the following information when AUPC is enabled Remote Eb No This is the current Eb No reported by the remote modem Power offset This is the current offset that has been applied to the nominal modem power output level in order to maintain the remote Eb No at the target level Link This is the status of the Engineering Service Channel ESC link which in non DVB S2 modes is used to pass AUPC control messages to the remote modem and to read back the remote Eb No level The ESC channel is not used when AUPC is used with DVB S2 The status is shown as Failed if the link is not working correctly otherwise it will be shown as OK 6 2 2 6 Status BUC LNB Under the Status BUC LNB tab Block Up Converter BUC status is continually updated with the following infor
228. odem It represents a timeout period after which the modem will automatically reload the selected configuration memory unless the operator intervenes to cancel the timeout 4 Click on the Reload button to start the timeout period at which point the screen will change to that shown in Figure 6 30 which shows the remaining timeout period along with the name of the configuration memory that will be reloaded In addition the Reload button changes to a Cancel button 5 Make any necessary changes to the remote modem s configuration 6 After completing the configuration changes navigate back to the Edit gt Memories gt Recall gt Advanced screen and cancel the timeout by clicking on the Cancel button The screen will now revert to its original format shown in Figure 6 29 ax Paired Carrier Recall Download Upload Memories LEPE Advanced Reversionary Control ACTIVE Time remaining 10 minutes Configuration to reload My_reload_configuration conf Figure 6 30 Edit gt Memories gt Advanced Reversionary Control Screen Active state 6 2 8 3 Edit gt Memories gt Store Screen The Edit gt Memories gt Store screen shown in Figure 6 29 allows the current modem configuration to be stored to a configuration memoriy under a given name It also displays all of the configurations that are already stored on the modem The Delete button can be used to delete a specific configuration memory 6 76 Q Flex Satellite Modem Inst
229. odem Installation and Operating Handbook The effect of Link Local is to transmit whatever is received over the satellite ESC channel out onto the local modem s M amp C bus while at the same time transmitting all incoming M amp C messages out over the satellite ESC channel The effect of Link Remote is to loop back whatever is received over the modem s satellite ESC channel to the modem s M amp C port and to transmit over the satellite ESC channel whatever is transmitted by the modem out of its M amp C port IP to Serial supports the transmission of IP wrappered RS485 messages through the ESC channel which are then transmitted as serial messages on the remote RS485 bus 13 3 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IBS Screen The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IBS screen shown in Figure 13 3 controls the overhead in IBS mode allowing both the low and high rate ESC channels to be set up Tx Rx SICH Framing BUC LNB Sra ro Overhead IBS MOE Tx high rate ESC data mode Rx high rate ESC mode Tx high rate ESC overhead Rx high rate ESC overhead usage usage 10 0 baud 0 0 baud Tx ESC interface baud rate Rx ESC interface baud rate Tx ESC interface character Rx ESC interface character length length Tx ESC interface parity J Rx ESC interface parity polarity polarity Tx IBS Aux mode f Rx IBS Aux mode Tx enable backward alarm Rx enable backward alarm ESC Interface ESC interface type AUX Interface Aux interface type
230. of the ESC channel e ESC interface type This specifies which of the modem s physical interfaces is to be connected through to the satellite ESC channel as described below Note that the rear panel Async ESC connector provides either a high rate asynchronous ESC interface for IBS and Closed Network Plus ESC overhead channel data or it provides the Aux function When an IDR interface card is fitted then the rear panel shared Async ESC port is disabled and the IDR card provides separate ESC and Aux ports In the case of RS232 RS422 and RS485 the relevant physical interface on the Async ESC port is directly connected through to the ESC channel and the data is therefore passed transparently i e whatever is passed through is what comes out on the equivalent interface on the remote modem without being interpreted in any way by either modem For example messages could be passed to control any manufacturer s piece of equipment that is listening on an RS485 multidrop bus at the remote modem An IP mode allows IP packets to be sent over the satellite ESC channel The ESC channel forms part of an Ethernet bridge and the modem therefore learns which IP packets should be sent over the ESC channel The IP packets need not be destined for the remote modem as they will be passed onto the remote Ethernet network if they are addressed to a device on that network The IP packets will be interleaved with AUPC messages when AUPC is switched on RS485 M amp C m
231. ognize the new address unless the Address Resolution Protocol ARP table on the device is flushed M amp C IP 255 255 0 0 Subnet Mask Default Description Sets the remote control port IP subnet mask 6 52 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Modem IP 0 0 0 0 Gateway Default Description Sets the IP address of a default gateway The gateway represents the next hop destination which is normally the address of a router for packets destined for somewhere other than the local network This is used whenever the P mode is set to Routing An address of 0 0 0 0 means that the gateway is not set Table 6 55 M amp C IP Address Subnet Mask amp Modem IP Gateway 6 2 2 10 Traffic Satelite IP Addresses and Subnet Masks Traffic This sets the IP address for the modem s IP Traffic port DHCP is not IP address supported for this address and therefore an address must be manually entered When IPv6 support is selected on the menus then additional address entry options are provided Traffic This sets the subnet mask for the modem s IP Traffic port IP subnet mask Satellite This sets the IP address for the modem s satellite IP port This is only IP address used when in routing mode when the modem acts as a two port router Satellite This sets the subnet mask for the modem s satellite IP port IP subnet mask Table 6 56 Traffic Satell
232. ol over the management of data within the modem Specifically it provides a guaranteed quality of service for defined IP data streams It is aligned with all of the major quality of service schemes and can be used to extend terrestrial services over satellite to create fully provisioned end to end services thereby providing direct support for the implementation of customer service level agreements Key time based performance metrics are gathered continuously by the modem and can be extracted in order to be assimilated into customer quality of service reports A satellite modem in general normally acts as a transparent pipe for data so the data that is finally received at the destination on the terrestrial network at the far end of the link is identical to that which has been supplied to the local modem for transmission over satellite This is not necessarily true for IP data Being packet based IP naturally supports multiplexing of different data streams These streams often have different inherent priority levels and competing demands for bandwidth What is transmitted over satellite often requires careful management both in terms of what is actually sent versus what is filtered out and in relation to the order in which packets from different streams are sent i e the relative priority levels of packets from different streams and the effect this has on packet jitter Traffic shaping essentially controls these two key aspects of traffic management
233. om Terrestrial To Terrestrial Figure 6 40 IP Throughput Graph QoS traffic shaping graphs are described in Section 7 8 9 An example ACM graph is shown in Figure 6 41 This shows the minimum average and maximum terrestrial data rate over the selected time period Note that this graph shows how the terrestrial data rate varies over time in direct relation to dynamic changes of modcod based on a varying Es No from the remote modem It does not show actual IP throughput which is available on the other IP throughput graphs The ACM graph therefore shows the actual bandwidth available over time which can be used to determine the benefit of using ACM particularly when viewed over longer time periods where the effects of short term fluctuations are removed By viewing the ACM graph over a long time period such as a month an average available bandwidth figure is produced that can be factored into new or revised service level agreements that incorporate the benefits of ACM when compared to the nominal data rate of the link without ACM An example of the ACM graph viewed over a shorter time period is shown in Figure 6 42 It is possible to put ACM into a monitor mode where the ACM graph logs what the terrestrial data rate would be for the prevailing conditions without ever actually changing the modcod This is useful for assessing the potential benefit of ACM on an existing link without disrupting the current service in any way or
234. oonnnnncccccnnnonnnnnnnnanccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnrrrr rn nnnnnnannnnnns 12 1 12 1 Common Main Specifications ENNEN 12 1 12 2 Tx Modulator Specifications aula ecard eel ated 12 3 123 Rx Demodulator Specifications x geseet sd 12 4 12 4 Clocking and Buffering Specifications ene 12 4 12 5 Framing and Deframing Specifications oooooonicnccccccnnncccnnccoanaccncnnnonnnanann cnn 12 5 12 6 Intelsat Reed Solomon Codec and Custom Option Specifications 12 6 12 7 Drop and Insert Option Specification cocino cinta ds 12 6 128 Extended Drop and Insert Option Specifications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 12 7 129 Advanced ESC and Advanced Aux Option Specifications oooocnnnnnnnn 12 8 12 10 IDR Option Specifications ENEE 12 8 12 11 BERT Option Specifications ENNEN 12 9 12 12 AUPC SpPecinca dt E 12 10 12 13 Traffic Log Specifications stsiis GEeGeEEeE 12 12 12 14 Common Specifications TEE 12 12 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 12 15 IMeriek Tramo ta a oe eben eee ese 12 13 12 16 BUC LNB facilities vastas dias Reena et wen weit 12 13 12 17 Performance Graphs camisa eee ea 12 14 Chapter 13 Advanced Franming cscccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneees 13 1 13 1 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing Screen ias Se ee A es 13 1 13 2 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead Closed Gcreen 13 2 13 3 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing gt Overhead IBS Gcreen ee 13 4 13 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing
235. otal to 650 000bps because this is all of the spare bandwidth and is less than the Class 0 BIR value In another example assume Class 2 is being received at 400 000bps and Class 1 at 950 000bps In this situation the Class 1 data stream will be allocated 800 000bps its maximum while Class 2 will be allocated only 200 000bps The spare bandwidth is allocated to Class 1 first because it has a higher priority When the BIR of Class 1 is reached the remaining spare bandwidth will be allocated to Class 2 7 26 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 9 4 2 Diffserv DSCP Class It is possible to classify data streams based on the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP value in the IP packet header The DSCP class bits are the top three bits of the DS field in an IP header the other three bits of the field indicate drop precedence which can be mimicked using the Priority setting for the stream in the modem Each packet passed to the modem must have this field set to the appropriate value in order for the modem to recognize the different data streams The modem maps the eight possible DSCP classes directly to eight equivalent internal modem classes each of which can be allocated its own CIR BIR etc DSCP Class 0 maps to internal modem QoS Class 0 etc down to DSCP Class 7 which maps to QoS Class 7 Class 7 has the highest priority An example traffic shaping scheme based on DSCP classification is shown in Figure 7
236. ots remaining A test shot enables all of the modem features for a 10 day period subject to suitable hardware being fitted and with some exceptions e The SAF Mix Code which is a number that represents all of the features that have been permanently enabled on the modem The Run Demo Test Shot button is used to start a 10 day activation of the modem s SAF features The Stop Demo Test Shot button is used to terminate the temporary activation of the modem s SAF features Any remaining time of the test period is lost 6 42 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The New SAF code edit box is used to enter a code provided by Paradise that unlocks additional modem features When unlocked the features immediately become available The act of unlocking SAF features will not itself interfere with any services being provided by the modem Entering a code of 0 will enable a test shot 6 2 13 Edit gt Unit gt Upgrade Screen The Edit gt Unit gt Upgrade screen is shown in Figure 6 18 This allows the modem s software to be upgraded and downgraded This can also be done via the front panel menus and a USB memory stick Le uit RESETS Memories Redundancy Station Clock Upgrade Open Click Open to select an upgrade image Figure 6 18 Edit gt Unit gt Upgrade Screen The latest software can be found under Downloads on the Paradise company web site at http www paradisedata com The software s
237. owing operation from 950MHz to 2050MHz optionally to 2150MHz Table 6 10 Tx Rx Frequency Band 6 2 4 13 Tx Rx Carrier Frequency There are various frequency control options depending on whether IF or L band has been selected and whether a BUC or LNB is fitted that is being controlled via the modem The frequency control options are presented in Tables 6 11 through 6 14 Range 50 0MHz to 180 0MHz step size 0 0001 MHz i e 100Hz Description This is the IF frequency used in transmitting to or receiving from satellite Note that values between 90MHz and 100MHz cannot be selected Table 6 11 Tx Rx Carrier Frequency IF Range 950 0MHz to 2050 0MHz step size 0 0001 MHz i e 100Hz there is an option to extend operation to 2150 0MHz Description This is the L band frequency used in transmitting to or receiving from satellite 6 17 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook If the BUC LO frequency has been set on the Edit gt Tx Rx gt BUC LNB menu then the L band transmit frequency will no longer be available and will be automatically controlled by the modem to achieve the requested BUC transmit frequency Table 6 12 Tx Rx Carrier Frequency L band Range 0 0GHz to 99 999GHz step size 0 0000001GHz i e 100Hz Description This is the BUC frequency used to transmit to satellite Table 6 13 BUC Carrier Freque
238. own in Table 5 2 These can be purchased on a pay as you go basis and retrospectively activated in deployed units as required The SAF concept including time limited free access to most features is explained in Section 8 5 In the table the SAF Code column lists the acronyms by which features are referred to on the modem s local user interface 5 5 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook SAF Feature Code Description Transmit TX Enables the Tx service Receive RX Enables the Rx service Terrestrial data rate DRO Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 2048kbps Terrestrial data rate DiL Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 5Mbps Terrestrial data rate D1H Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 10Mbps Terrestrial data rate DR2 Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 25Mbps Terrestrial data rate DR3 Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 60Mbps Terrestrial data rate DR4 Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 100Mbps Terrestrial data rate DR5 Enables data rates in the given range 0 to 160Mbps XStream IP XSIP This provides the following features IP traffic shaping Provides guaranteed throughput levels for specific IP streams using Committed Information Rate and Burst Information Rate Stream differentiation is by IP address IEEE 802 1p priority class Diffserv DSCP class MPLS EXP field VLAN ID or PID value IP header compression E
239. plitter combiner of the correct impedance 50Q or 75Q and the appropriate frequency range The combined output is fed to the up conversion equipment Note that only one output is active at a time Because of the signal loss associated with splitters combiners the power level at the output of each modem needs to be increased by approximately 3 5dB Connect the two receive IF ports to the two output ports of a suitable powersplitter combiner of the correct impedance 500 or 750 and the appropriate frequency range Both demodulators will receive an identical signal from the down conversion equipment via the splitter combiner Because of the wide dynamic range of the modem AGC circuitry there should be no need to modify signal levels Check correct operation by performing a manual switch between the units via the Unit Advanced Operation menu The pair will not switch over unless the Standby unit is fully operational Note that the pair can be tested in loopback mode but this requires the IF signals to be split and combined and looped back to the other unit Looping the output of one unit back to its self will not work since the Standby unit output is muted and it will therefore not detect any carrier IP Addressing and Operation in Redundancy Configurations 7 3 4 1 1 1 IP Operation The following rules should be observed when using 1 1 redundancy for IP 1 2 3 In 1 1 mode the M amp C IP addresses need to be different for each modem
240. pression ROHC of IP UDP headers e IP UDP RTP headers e IP TCP headers e All Ethernet headers The 40 bytes of IP UDP and RTP headers are typically compressed to between one to three bytes Ethernet header compression is also supported The 14 bytes of Ethernet frame the Ethernet CRC is not sent over satellite even when compression is off are typically reduced to one byte Before Header Compression IP UDP RTP Payload 20 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes Variable size depending on codec Header 40 bytes After Header Compression Header Payload 1to 3 bytes Variable size depending on codec Example G 729 packet with 20ms 20 bytes of payload e Original size 40 byte header IP UDP RTP 14 bytes Ethernet 20 bytes payload 5 bytes HDLC 79 bytes Following compression 1 byte header IP UDP RTP 1 byte Ethernet 20 bytes payload 5 bytes HDLC 27 bytes best case This represents more than a 60 bandwidth reduction There is support for per route configuration control where you can specify up to 32 source or destination IP addresses only packets with one of these addresses get directed through the compressor Header compression runs up to 29000 packets per second one way 22000 packets per second two way on the IP Traffic card 7 8 12 VLAN Operation A VLAN allows virtual networks to be created as opposed to being limited to purely physical segments Benefits include creating a r
241. put A long test pattern must be selected in order to make sure that the pattern is unique for longer than the actual latency period otherwise the latency will be under reported The Sync OK LED shows the instantaneous test pattern synchronisation status When the Rx path is synchronised to the incoming Tx test pattern then the LED will be green and it will be red when synchronisation is lost The analyser Sync Lost Threshold can be customised or left as Auto The Counter Action on Sync Loss can be set to Reset Continue or Freeze allowing further customization of the display The Restart button can be used to start or restart the BER test including clearing all of the error counts 6 92 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 3 Front panel Interface 6 3 1 Keypad Operation 6 3 1 1 Cursor An inverse video cursor is used to navigate around the LCD display 6 3 1 2 Navigation Keys The menu options are arranged into a hierarchy of menus Navigation is performed using the arrow and ENTER keys or by entry of the number associated with each menu option Arrow Keys The Up arrow key moves the cursor up one line except when entering a numeric value when it increments the digit highlighted by the cursor The Up arrow key is also used to enter a hyphen when a range of values is required such as for timeslots The Down arrow key moves the cursor down one line except when entering a numeric value when it decre
242. r receive alarm occurs 6 78 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook If both transmit and receive fail switchovers are set to off then the 1 1 redundancy system will only switch over on unit faults and all transmit or receive traffic faults will be ignored Traffic warnings will never cause a switchover regardless of how the fail switchover settings are configured In a 1 1 pair the Clear 1 1 alarm button can be used on the Standby modem when it is exhibiting a fault to temporarily suppress the fault condition in order to allow the Standby modem to be forced online This is useful when both modems in the 1 1 pair are showing faults but the Standby modem is exhibiting a less severe failure than the current online modem thereby allowing the best possible satellite service to be maintained in the circumstances In a 1 1 pair the Switch to standby button forces the modem that is online into Standby mode This is done by momentarily creating a fault condition that forces a switchover to occur The Switch to maintenance button prevents the modem from being switched online This facilitates the modem being removed for example to be repaired Once the modem is in Maintenance mode the Switch to maintenance button is replaced with a Switch to service button which can be used to reverse the process by making the modem available to come online 6 2 10 View Screen The View screen shown in Figure 6 35 allows the followin
243. rbi FEC TCM This selects the Trellis Coded Modulation TCM FEC Sequential This selects the Sequential FEC Table 6 8 Tx Rx FEC Type 6 2 4 10 Tx Rx Modulation The modulations that are available depend on the FEC type selected The supported combinations are listed in Table 6 9 6 2 4 11 Tx Rx FEC Code Rate The FEC rates that are available depend on the FEC type and modulation that are selected The supported combinations are listed in Table 6 9 6 15 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook FastLink BPSK 0 499 QPSK and OQPSK 0 532 0 639 0 710 0 798 8PSK 0 639 0 710 0 778 8QAM 0 639 0 710 0 778 16APSK 0 726 0 778 0 828 0 851 16QAM 0 726 0 778 0 828 0 851 32APSK 0 778 0 828 0 886 0 938 64QAM 0 828 0 886 0 938 0 960 DVB S2 and SmartLink QPSK 1 4 1 3 2 5 1 2 3 5 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 8PSK 3 5 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 9 9 10 16APSK 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 32APSK 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 Note that DVB S2 32APSK is available when DVB S2 is purchased as part of DVB S2X but is not available when the low cost DVB S2 option is purchased DVB S2X DVB S2X Low latency Mode Normal Frame QPSK 13 45 9 20 11 20 8PSK 23 36 25 36 13 18 8APSK L 5 9 26 45 16APSK 26 45 3 5 28 45 23 36 25 36 13 18 7 9 77 90 16APSK L 5 9 8 15 1 2 3 5 2 3 32APSK 32 45 11 15 7 9 32APSK L 2 3 64APSK 11 15 7 9
244. re not to discard any packing materials Should the unit need to be returned to Teledyne Paradise Datacom then you should use the original packing carton as it is designed to provide the necessary level of protection during shipment Once unpacked visually inspect the contents to ensure all parts are present and that there is no visible damage Other than the unit itself the shipping container should contain a power cord and a Quick Start Guide 4 2 Line Supply This satellite modem is classified by the EN 60950 1 safety standard as a pluggable equipment Class A The mains operating range is 90V to 250V A 48V DC input option is available Power consumption ranges from 40W to a maximum of 300W when a BUC PSU is fitted A power cord suitable for use in the country of operation is provided If the power cord needs to be replaced at any point then the replacement must be manufactured to an equivalent specification Compatible cable ratings include HAR BASEC and HOXXX X Compatible connector ratings include BS1636A BSI VDE NF USE UL CSA OVE CEBEC NEMKO DEMKO SETI IMQ SEV and KEMA KEUR The installation of the satellite modem and the connection to the line supply must be made in compliance with local and national wiring regulations for a Category Il impulse over voltage installation The satellite modem should be positioned to allow a convenient means of disconnection from the line supply 4 3 Rack Mounting If t
245. red depends on the size of the routing tables that are exchanged and the frequency with which they are exchanged Dynamic routing is supported via the Quagga software package ltan only be used on point to point links It is possible to enable routing TCP acceleration and traffic shaping together at the same time but routing is incompatible with the header compression feature Configuration of dynamic routing protocols can be complex and for this reason the modem provides only a default configuration for the RIP and OSPF protocols that can be enabled from the user interfaces These will be all that is required in many cases Further configuration of all routing protocols is available for expert users via a telnet interface to the Quagga software the Quagga user manual available from http www quagga net docs quagga pdf You can telnet into a different command line interpreter for setting up each routing protocol and one that can be used for basic level setup of all routing protocols These provide Cisco lOS like commands that will be familiar to users of Cisco equipment When using telnet to login to the Quagga the default password is paradise various port numbers are used to access the routing protocol to be configured as follows RIP port 2602 OSPF port 2604 BGP port 2605 Zebra port 2601 7 30 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 11 Header Compression The modem supports RObust Header Com
246. rence power spectral density The Eb No of the distant modem being controlled via AUPC The transmit power level while under AUPC control CPU usage ACM data rate An example graph is shown in Figure 6 43 Graphs PES Setup Constellation a Others IEEE Es Eb No Freq Offset AUPC Eb No Minute Hour Day Month 20 0 1757 15 0 125 10 0 Eb No dB 75 5 0 25 0 0 16 45 20 16 45 30 16 45 40 16 45 50 16 46 00 16 46 10 Modem Time 05 March 2013 Figure 6 43 Eb No Graph 6 2 10 5 Alarms System alarms can be viewed using the View gt Alarms screen shown in Figure 6 44 Alarms are latched and their status will be shown as Off if they are no longer active The Accept button can be used to delete all of the alarms after which the web page will automatically update and show details of any alarms that are still active 6 86 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Alarms Setup SA CCAA AA Show alarm type Fault Warnings al Alarm Name Status Level Rx fault Demodulator unlocked Check modem settings Fault Rx fault FEC Decoder synchronisation los Fault Figure 6 44 System Alarms Screen 6 2 10 6 System Log The system log can be viewed using the View gt Log screen shown in Figure 6 45 The Clearc button can be used to delete all of the entries in the log The Download Log file button can be used to download a text file of the lo
247. rface electrical type Backward alarm control IBS overhead allocation to Sux channel Sux interface electrical type IBS SMS High rate ESC mode High rate ESC usage Max ESC rate ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity IBS overhead allocation to Sux channel ESC interface electrical type Sux interface electrical type ESC level cht ESC level ch2 Backward alarm control IDR IDR 8k ESC mode ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type IDR ESC audio encoding IDR overhead assignment to Sux channel Sux interface electrical type ESC level ch ESC level ch2 Backward alarm control Figure 6 54 Front panel Edit gt Rx Menus 6 100 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 3 3 Edit gt Unit Menu UNIT Interface M amp C Alarms Clock SAF Upgrade hise INTERFACE Terrestrial Terrestrial interface type IP speed duplex G703 rate G703 line format G703 line encoding G703 line length Quad E1 Quad El timeslot set up per port M amp C Control Modem control Passwords Remote admin password Remote view only user password Interface Remote serial interface mode Remote serial interface baud rate Remote serial interface RS485 address Identity Modem identity SNMP SNMP on off ALARMS Link Guard interferer monitor Link Guard interferer threshold Tx AIS alarm action Rx AIS alarm action Eb No threshold Deferred dista
248. rrier will be muted Tx fault Data input is all The data supplied to the modem is all ones AIS This is ones AIS indicating normally used to indicate an upstream equipment fault It upstream equipment fault is not a modem fault This alarm can be switched off if required using the Edit gt Unit gt Advanced gt Alarms gt Actions menu Tx fault Frame sync lost The modem detects frame synchronisation when the Drop on Tx input Check bearer MUX is active or 2048k IBS G 732 mode is enabled type and AIS Check the bearer type is specified correctly This fault normally occurs only when there are significant errors on the terrestrial link or when the signal is supplied with AIS and the modem is set to ignore AIS Check that the AIS detector is not disabled There is an option to make the modem re seek frame synchronisation when CRC synchronisation is lost check the modem is not set to expect a CRC and is forcing frame re acquisition when CRC is lost but there is no CRC on the PCM signal Tx fault Dropped data is The specific timeslots dropped by the Drop MUX contain all ones AIS indicating all ones AIS This is different to the Tx Fault Data input upstream equipment fault is all ones AIS message described above which refers to the whole PCM bearer being AIS In this case it is only the specific dropped timeslots that contain AIS This is normally used to indicate an upstream equipment fault it is not a
249. s Tx clock source Rx clock source Tx modulation Rx modulation Tx FEC type Rx FEC type Tx FEC code rate 172 Rx FEC code rate 172 Modem carrier L band output power dBrn Tx carrier frequency 950 0000 MHz Rx carrier frequency 950 0000 MHz BUC carrier frequency 0 0000000 GHz LNB carrier frequency 0 0000000 GHz Tx spectral inversion Rx spectral inversion Tx framing overhead Rx framing overhead Figure 6 46 View gt Setup Screen 6 2 10 8 View gt Unit Screen The View gt Unit screen shown in Figure 6 47 displays manufacturing information including the software version number and the hardware fitted power supply voltage levels modem temperature indication loopback status and the IP address of the M amp C port for when this has been set using DHCP 6 88 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Graphs Alarms M amp C IP Address M amp C IP address 10 101 224 10 Modem IP gateway 0 0 0 0 Manufacturing Unit Model Q Flex Serial number 312000037 Software version EG050313 Firmware version RC 0 0 22 Transmit IF L band strip Receive IF L band strip Hardware fitted ZS k High stability oscillator Quad El interface card Lower PSU 24V 12V Temperature Modem temperature Degrees C Loopback Loopback M amp C IP subnet mask 12 11 75v 3 3v _ 3 25 Figure 6 47 View gt Unit Screen 6 2 10 9 View gt SAF Screen The View gt SAF screen shown in
250. s Eb No for TPC 8PSK 12 17 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Test Conditions i FEC Turbo Rate 2093kHz 160 4 Tx 70 000 MHz Rx 70 000 Miz Scrambling E Normal Turbo Figure 13 4 Modem Error Probability versus Eb No FOR TPC 16QAM 12 18 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Paradise Turbo Product Code Rate 0 93 1 00E 03 pg Paradise 16QAM Typ Paradise 16QAM Spec gp Paradise 8PSK Typ Paradise 8PSK Spec gt Paradise QPSK Typ X Paradise QPSK Spec Comtech 8PSK Typ Comtech 8PSK Spec Comtech QPSK Typ Comtech QPSK Spec 1 00E 04 1 00E 05 D 4 006 u 1 00E 06 1 00E 07 1 00E 08 1 00E 09 Figure 13 5 Modem Error Probability versus Eb No For TPC Rate 0 93 versus Comtech TPC Rate 0 95 12 19 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 13 Advanced Framing This chapter describes the advanced framing options available on the modem 13 1 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing Screen The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Framing screen shown in Figure 13 1 allows configuration of framing timeslots and overhead Tx Rx Paired Carrier Redundancy Framing BUC LNB Overhead Closed Overhead IBS Overhead IDR Framing Mode Tx baseband mode Rx baseband mode Framing Format Tx 2048k data format Rx 2048k data format Tx G 732 CAS signalling Rx G 732 CAS signalling Drop bearer format Insert bearer format
251. s follows The interface type can be selected as Synchronous or Asynchronous Signal Description Circuit Electrical Number Levels DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX Int Tx Clock Out DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX Sig Valid Out COMMON LINES Device DTE Ready In RS232 Device DCE Ready Out e RS232 kr kb Ja IL Je Jeer Jk Je IL Je The maximum synchronous data rate is 100kbps over good quality screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles e 50kbps to 20m 25kbps to 40m etc Note that this is a synchronous RS232 interface if you need an asynchronous interface then please contact the factory 9 7 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook For the Synchronous RS232 interface theinput clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data In signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data In signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal By selecting Advanced it is po
252. se the incoming data from the satellite is subject to Doppler shift which occurs in an approximately 24 hour cycle The Doppler shift is due to the satellite movement relative to the earth and is directly proportional to its station keeping accuracy Towards the end of a satellite s life when its station keeping is degraded to save fuel the Doppler shift on incoming signals increases and buffers may have to be increased in size The receive buffer acts as an elastic store or First In First Out FIFO memory gradually emptying and filling to absorb differences over the 24 hour period A design aim should be to have all clock signals within the system originating from one master source in order to ensure that the buffer does not underflow or overflow during the 24 hour cycle This is where there is more than one clock in the system and a buffer is required to absorb the difference between the clocks Data is typically placed into the buffer with one clock and removed with another causing continuous filling or emptying of the buffer and resulting in buffer slips on a regular basis The period between buffer slips will be constant and proportional to the difference between the two clocks Each buffer slip will result in a temporary loss of data and therefore this clocking scheme is not ideal The buffer itself is independent of the clocking scheme and will support all methods of system clocking With typical earth station clock accuracies buffers
253. sed with a wide range of SFP modules All optical connector types such as LC and SC and all types of optical cable single mode multi mode all wavelengihs are supported subject to a compatible SFP module being fitted Due to the wide range of optical cabling and connector options no SFP module is provided with the card 5 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 5 3 1 5 IDR Option Card The Intermediate Data Rate IDR option card part number P3721 provides an IESS 308 compliant IDR capability including two 32kbps ADPCM ESC audio channels multiple backward alarms support and independent ESC and Auxiliary ports that replace the shared ESC Aux port on the base unit The connectivity is via a 50 way D type female connector The following software features are included as standard with the IDR option card e Advanced AUX feature providing variable rate synchronous Aux channel This includes the option to replace IDR audio channels with serial data e Audio option For IBS carriers this allows two audio streams in 64kbps or two audio and 64kbps data in 128kbps this requires the IBS option 5 3 1 6 LVDS Option Card The Low Voltage Differential Signal LVDS option card part number P3001 provides LVDS at data rates of up to 60Mbps via a 25 way D type female connector 5 3 1 7 HSSI Option Card The High Speed Serial Interface HSSI option card part number P3705 provides HSSI at data rates of up to 60Mbps v
254. should never need to be larger than 16ms Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 1 1 Transmit Clocking There are three transmit clocking modes that are used in the modem 7 1 1 1 Internal Clock When Internal is selected the modem which is always configured to be a Data Communications Equipment DCE supplies the clock This is provided by the modem to the Data Terminal Equipment DTE via the External Transmit Clock ETC signal line for using in clocking the data through to the modem It is important that the terrestrial data coming into the modem uses the ETC clock looped back through the DTE equipment Tx Data TxClock TT Internal Tx Clock ST voy Y FIFO DDS l VCXO Modem Tx Data Interface Q TCXO Figure 7 1 Internal Tx Clock Mode 7 1 1 2 Tx Clock In When Tx Clock In is selected the DTE equipment is responsible for providing the clock The modem provides a signal on Send Timing ST in this mode and requires a clock signal to be provided on Terminal Timing TT The ST signal is provided in order to allow the DTE to be operated with a modem supplied clock in a similar way to when Internal Clock is selected but the TT and Send Data SD phase relationship will be correctly aligned If the external clock is missing for any reason then the modem will substitute an internal clock Note that the G 703 interface should always use ex
255. source IP addresses that read write requests will be accepted from The trap receiver fields are used to define the IP address of a trap server to which trap notifications will be sent when modem alarms arise and when they disappear SNMP can be controlled by the SNMP enable setting SNMP is switched off by default The modem does not need to be configured to tell it which version of SNMP is being used and will respond correctly to all SNMP commands regardless of the version The modem s SNMP Management Information Bases MIBs can be downloaded directly from the modem using the Download MIB files hyperlink at the bottom of the screen 6 2 8 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C gt Email Screen The Edit gt Unit gt M8 C gt Email screen is shown in Figure 6 12 6 34 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook i unit ZE CES ETT M amp C Station Clock Upgrade Sol Email Rue SMTP Mail Server Outgoing mail server Authentication required Account name Password Email Reporting Distant EbNo Rx power level AUPC power offset Modem temperature Event log ET Current alarms Configuration memories Spectral data Constellation data PRBS BER Rx EbNo Rx frequency offset Unit faults Recipient amp Interval Recipient s email Subject Paradise modem auto status report Bounce address Email report interval Disabled v Download as zip Figure 6 12 Edit gt Unit gt M amp C gt Email Scr
256. ssible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line CA or Device DTE Ready In line CD switch to the inactive state lt is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line CA by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled For Asynchronous RS232 interface the Tx Rx AIS detectors and the data marginal detectors are automatically disabled to prevent any unwanted alarms The internal Tx clock output is also automatically used to provide a reference clock to the incoming Async data For best operation Paradise recommends using the Async RS232 interface at least 10 times oversampled For example an Async baud rate of 56 7kbaud requires a Modem bit rate of 512kbit ElA 530 Interface in X 21 Mode The ElA530 interface can provide both X 21 DCE and X 21 DTE operation For X 21 operation the interface must be set to RS422 mode and the Tx 8 Rx Clocking modes must be set correctly With the use of the appropriate adaptor lead to convert to the X 21 standard 15 pin D connector a full X 21 DCE or DTE interface is available 9 8 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook X 21 DCE Operation This has only a clock from the modem to the terrestrial equipment Configure a cable with a 15 pin D female at one end X 21 DCE and a 25 pin D male at the other end as follows X 21 DCE Signal Circuit Electrical 15 pin D female Description Num
257. stallation and Operating Handbook The information is sent in Comma Separated Value CSV format which allows the data to be copied into any spreadsheet from where it can be viewed in a number of formats e g as a graph or a table and from which reports can be generated The relevant data is appended to the email as separate attachments The modem needs to know where to send all emails in order for them to be forwarded to individual email accounts This is the outgoing SMTP mail server name e g smtp yourmailserver com An account name and password may be necessary The recipient s email address subject email title and email reporting interval should be set as required The Reply to address field is optional and is the address used to deliver failure notifications in the event that an email cannot be delivered to the recipient s email address The following example demonstrates how to graph modem constellation data in a spreadsheet Configure the SMTP mail server and recipient email details Select the Constellation data check box and click the Send email now button Wait for the email to be received at the recipient s account and open it To import the constellation data into a spreadsheet program Microsoft Excel is used in this example double click on the email attachment constellation csv to open it this should automatically start the spreadsheet application if not then save the attachment and open it directly from withi
258. stem log and system alarms can be cleared by pressing the O key when on the front panel View gt Log and View gt Alarms screens Buffer Overflow Underflow clear The buffer Overflow and Underflow slip counters can be cleared by pressing the 0 key when on the front panel Status gt Demodulator screen 6 3 2 LCD Screen Layout The front panel user interface uses a menu system to present choices to the user These in turn allow either the selection of a value from a list of options or require the setting of a new value Examples of these types of screen are shown below Station clock source None 1 None 2 BNC 3 RS422 Screen Type 1 Menu Selection from Pre defined List IF carrier freq 50 to 90 100 to 180MHz 070 0000 Step 100Hz New 070 0000 Screen Type 2 Entry of New Value Features that are not available appear on the display are preceded by a There are several reasons why a feature may not be available e The feature is a Software Activated Feature SAF and the appropriate SAF code has not been enabled Please contact Paradise Sales who can issue a SAF key to unlock the feature e The feature is available but its use is precluded by the current operational modem settings 6 95 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 Front Panel Menu Structure The menu hierarchy for the front panel is described in the following sections 6 4 1 Main Menu London New York 1 Status 2 Edit
259. t 1P Paired Carrier Redundancy Paired Carrier enable Round trip delay Set location Satellite longitude 0 00 Degrees Earth station longitude 0 00 Degrees Earth station latitude 0 00 Degrees Calculated satellite delay 238 40 ms Min round trip delay 0 01 ms Max round trip delay 0 01 ms Figure 6 26 Edit gt Paired Carrier Screen 6 2 7 1 Paired Carrier Enable This is an On Off control that enables and disables Paired CarrierTM operation Deployment recommendations for first time use of Paired CarrierTM are provided in the information box on the next page When switched on the modem expects the received signal to consist of two overlapped carriers utilizing the same space segment When active a copy of the modem s transmitted signal will be stored in memory and the Paired Carrier signal processing algorithm will attempt to match this with the composite return signal in order to subtract the unwanted near signal leaving just the far carrier Prior to enabling Paired CarrierTM t is necessary to set up the delay to satellite as in the following menu options Note that there are no other control settings that are specific to Paired CarrierTM operation other settings used by the Paired Carrier algorithm such as centre frequency and sweep width form part of the normal setup of the modem even for non overlapped carriers and work in the same way The cancellation bandwidth itself is automatically deduced by the modem
260. t appears to be wrong the circumstances under which it occurs and what other equipment is involved 3 Provide an official Purchase Order to cover the cost of any repairs or sign disclaimer on the Fault Report page 4 Outside of the UK contact either the UK or US Teledyne Paradise Datacom offices for a Return Material Authorisation RMA number and information on import export procedures The RMA number must be quoted on all documentation and on the outside of the packaging Within the UK contact Paradise UK for an RMA number 5 Generate the required import paperwork explicitly following the import export procedures stated when the RMA number was given 6 Outside of the UK fax the paperwork to us directly and return the goods to Teledyne Paradise Datacom Within the UK fax the paperwork and return the goods to the Teledyne Paradise Datacom UK facility 15 1
261. tallation and Operating Handbook 6 2 7 6 Calculated Satellite Delay When the method for establishing the round trip delay is set to Set location then the satellite delay calculated by the modem will be displayed This can be used to reduce the acquisition time by setting minimum and maximum delay values based around the calculated value It can also be compared to the actual satellite delay reported on the Status screen with any significant difference in these two values potentially indicating a false lock 6 2 7 7 Minimum Round trip Delay Range 0 01ms to 400ms step size 0 01ms Description The minimum satellite round trip delay To minimize the Paired Carrier acquisition time set this to the actual measured satellite delay value shown on the Status gt PCMA screen minus 0 5ms Table 6 78 Minimum Round trip Delay 6 2 7 8 Maximum Round trip Delay Range 0 01ms to 400ms step size 0 01ms Description The maximum satellite round trip delay To minimize the Paired CarrierTM acquisition time set this to the actual measured satellite delay value shown on the Status gt PCMA screen plus 0 5ms Table 6 79 Maximum Round trip Delay 6 2 8 Edit gt Memories Screen The Edit gt Memories screens shown in this section allow the user to store and recall modem configurations referred to as configuration memories These can also be uploaded and downloaded to and from a PC or equivalent to a
262. tantly whenever required maximising throughput at all times Because the symbol rate is kept constant any change in modcod will change the terrestrial data rate An increase in data rate does not need to be explicitly signalled to the terrestrial network A decrease does because it could result in a buffer overflow in the transmit modem if it receives more data than it can transmit Upstream buffer control is achieved by sending Ethernet Pause frames that define a period of time for which transmission should be suspended In principle Pause frames are supported only for full duplex links and support for them in vendor equipment is optional therefore the modem auto negotiates this capability with the attached equipment Paradise ACM is intrinsically tied to an IP traffic shaper and TCP accelerator allowing data grooming to match data priority to the available bandwidth Without this there would be no effective data management of a dynamically varying channel which would become a free for all where you would not be sure which packets will be passed over satellite and which will be dropped Note that an external traffic shaper cannot be aware of the instantaneous data rate in the modem and is therefore restricted to shaping for the nominal data rate of the link i e for a fixed modcod The Ethernet Pause frame does not help in any way with external traffic shaping its purpose is purely to minimize any packet loss at the point in time when a
263. tch status Modem priority setting REDUNDANCY Switch learn polling rate Figure 6 52 Front panel Edit Menus 6 98 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 4 3 1 Edit gt Tx Menu Tx Service Data rate Symbol rate Baseband Clocks hodcod Carrier BUC SERVICE Tx service DATA RATE Data rate SYMBOL RATE Symbol rate BASEBAND Framing Timeslots Overhead CLOCKS Tx path clock source MODCOD FEC type Modulation Code rate DWB 52 frame size DWB 52 pilots FastLink optimisation mode RS mode CARRIER IF L band selection Frequency Roll off Inversion Power Enable AUPC Mode Method Carrier loss action Target remote Eb No Max positive power offset Max negative power offset Acknowledge power break BUC Interface type LO frequency DC out on off 10MHz2 on off Carrier on off Attentuation 1 1 services FRAMING Baseband mode 2048k data format G 732 CAS signaling Drop bearer format TIMESLOTS Timeslot selection Timeslot ID maintenance over satellite Idle code insertion OVERHEAD Closed ESC ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity ESC interface electrical type Backward alarm control IBS overhead allocation to Aux channel Aux interface electrical type IBS SMS High rate ESC mode Max ESC rate ESC interface baud rate ESC interface character length ESC interface parity IBS overhead allocation to Aux channel ESC interface electric
264. te Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 1E 1 Test Conditions FEC Rate 2 3 Pragmatic TCM e Rate 2048 kbps 8PSK 1E 2 TX 70 0000 MHz RX 70 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling 1E 3 Input Level 45 dBm 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 RS Concatenated Reed Solomon a Outer Coding 219 201 1E 8 TCM no RS TCM plus RS 1E 9 Eb No in dB Figure 13 1 Modem Error Probability versus Eb No for 8PSK TCM 12 15 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 1E 1 4 i I i Figure 13 2 Modem Error Probability versus Eb No for TPC QPSK 12 16 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook BER 1 00E 02 Test Conditions FEC Turbo Rate 2048kHz 8PSK Tx 70 000 MHz Rx 70 000 MHz 1 00E 08 Scrambling Normal Turbo 1 00E 04 1 00E 05 1 00E 06 1 00E 07 Rate 3 4 Rate 7 8 Spec Limit Spec Limit 1 00E 08 1 00E 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figure 13 3 Modem Error Probability versu
265. te Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 3 Safety and Compliance Information PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION BEFORE INSTALLATION AND USE 3 1 Safety Compliance To ensure operator safety this satellite modem conforms to the provisions of EMC Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and complies with the following standard e EN 60950 1 2006 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment Prior to installation and at all points during operation the following points must be observed e This satellite modem must be operated with its cover on at all times in order to provide protection from potentially lethal internal voltages Never operate the unit with the cover removed e This satellite modem must be directly connected to a protective earth ground at all times using the chassis ground stud situated on the rear of the unit e The power system to which this satellite modem is connected must provide separate ground neutral and line conductors The power system must have a direct ground connection Note that the ground stud in itself does not provide a protective earth connection until the satellite modem is coupled to a suitable power supply cord containing a protective earth terminal e This satellite modem has double pole neutral fusing To ensure operator safety fuses should always be replaced with identical type and rating e To allow rapid disconnection from the mains i
266. te Modem Installation and Operating Handbook means that FastLink LDPC has now superseded Paradise s conventional LDPC offering This flexibility also means that FastLink can be used in a wide range of demanding applications allowing a single FEC to potentially replace the use of multiple existing FECs If one FEC is to be used in place of all others then Paradise believes you should choose one with flexible configuration as opposed to a fixed set of modulation and code rates that are inevitably a compromise FastLink is available on all Paradise SCPC modems at all data rates up to 100Mbps FastLink LDPC is compatible with Paired Carrier FastLink does not interoperate with any other LDPC FastLink performance a full set of BER graphs and latencies is defined in a separate datasheet available from the Teledyne Paradise Datacom web site at http www paradisedata com FastLink performance is summarized in Table 7 1 7 16 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Es Code Rate Eb No for 5e 8 Guaranteed Latency ms at 64kbps Low Latency Low Latency Low Modulation BER Balanced Balanced BPSK O QPSK O QPSK O QPSK O QPSK 8PSK 8PSK 8PSK 8QAM 8QAM 8QAM 16APSK 16APSK 16APSK 16APSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 32APSK 32APSK 32APSK 32APSK Table 7 1 FastLink Low latency LDPC Performance Summary 7 17 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Note 1 8PSK rate 0
267. te modem packets received over the ESC on port 6701 are treated as local M amp C commands for the modem and go no further e You can send M amp C packets to port 6701 on the local modem at any time when using the ESC channel in IP mode without having to set the Remote M amp C interface f you just want to bridge IP packets then you can ignore the remote M amp C interface setting To summarise the ESC bridging options e IP can be used over the ESC and the main data channel at the same time whether using the base modem IP or the IP Traffic card e With the M amp C port in the bridge and IP selected for both the ESC and main data channel the M amp C port is now bridged to the ESC channel not the IP traffic port The IP traffic port is still bridged but only to the satellite port when the ESC is not being used bridging the M amp C port bridges it to the IP traffic port and the satellite port Note that the ESC channel is used to support the AUPC feature but this does not prevent it being used for other purposes at the same time the AUPC messages are just multiplexed in with the other data 7 21 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 8 6 IP Interoperability Over satellite the modem uses HDLC to encapsulate the Ethernet frames or IP packets unless DVB S2 is being used in which case another form of encapsulation is used such as MPE or ULE If Cisco HDLC is selected on the modem then the received IP str
268. ted 6 2 1 3 Carrier ID Custom Message and Telephone Number The Carrier ID Custom message and Telephone number fields are optional If entered this information will be transmitted as part of the Carrier ID signal and will be available for viewing via a suitable Carrier ID decoder 6 2 1 4 Carrier ID This is an Enabled Disabled control that controls the generation of the Carrier ID spread spectrum signal Carrier ID is an optional feature and can be made available on all Q Series modems via a software upgrade The Carrier ID feature is not provided as standard and the Carrier ID SAF must therefore be activated on the modem for the feature to be available on the menus 6 2 2 Edit gt IP Screen The Edit gt IP screen shown in Figure 6 22 allows the following to be set up e Basic and advanced IP modes and features such as bridging routing acceleration and compression e The modem s terrestrial and satellite traffic IP addresses e Miscellaneous IP features used for specialized modes of operation e Further tabs are available that allow the setup of advanced features VCM multistreaming and MPEG2 transport streams traffic shaping QoS and static routes Ethernet speed duplex settings are available on the Edit gt Unit gt Interface screen 6 46 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook X RX IP Paired Carrier Memories Advanced IP Mode Static Routes IPv4 IP mode Bridge mode TCP acceleration
269. terface SCPC Framer DVB S2 Framer Outer FEC Inner FEC Modulator Demodulator shows the path used in DVB S2 and SmartLink processing Note that pure DVB S2 bypasses the SCPC framer and uses the DVB S2 framer only SmartLink takes the output of the SCPC framer which includes the output from Drop and Insert the ESC channel etc and overlays this with DVB S2 framing Even although this can involve two lots of framing depending on whether SCPC Closed Network mode is selected the increased overhead is more than offset by the savings of switching to DVB S2 space segment Figure 7 14 shows which features can be mixed in SmartLink mode and which cannot for example 16QAM appears on the SCPC processing path only and is therefore not available when SmartLink is operational 7 34 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 8 6KbN to GIE 20mb Modulator Interface ElA530 IBS SMS RS Intelsat Viterbi BPSK X21V 35 R5232 IDR BC TPC QPSK RS422 Closed Net ESC OM 73 Scrambler TCM OQPSK LVDS Closed Net 35 Scrambler LDPC 8PSK G703 75 120 ohm IBS Scrambler Sequential 1604M Turbo Scrambler Quad El RJ 45 IP RJ 45 Eurocom PURE DVB S2 BYPASSES SCPC FRAMER Modulator DVB S2 OPTIONAL PROCESSING PATH FOR HYBRID SCPCIDVB S2 OPERATION DVB S2 BCH LDPC QPSK Baseband 8PSK Frame 16 APSK DVB S2 SPACE SEGMENT Figure 7 14 Processing Paths through Modem Top path is SCPC lower path is DVB S
270. ternal clocking 7 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Tx Data TxClock TT Internal Tx Clock ST oy Modem Tx Data Interface y FIFO DDS PLL TCXO VCXO Figure 7 2 External Tx Clock Mode 7 1 1 3 Receive Reference When Receive Reference is selected it allows the modem to provide an ST clock to the DTE that is locked to the receive satellite signal The timing is actually phase locked to the Rx data rate but at the frequency of the Tx data rate This is to allow asymmetric operation The DTE then synchronises the data going into the modem SD to this clock If the external clock is missing for any reason then the modem will substitute an internal clock Tx Data TxClock TT Internal Tx Clock ST nov 4 Modem Tx Data Interface FIFO DDS VCXO vi ui VCXO A Rx Clk Figure 7 3 Receive Reference Tx Clock Mode 7 3 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 1 2 Receive Clocking There are four receive clocking modes that are used in the modem 7 1 2 1 Satellite When Satellite is selected the modem disables the Rx Doppler buffer and derives a clock from the incoming satellite signal This means that the signal will be subject to Doppler plesiochronous offsets RxData Rx Clock RT d Modem R
271. the serial port regularly for GPS position information Two GPS protocols are supported namely GPS Fix Data GGA and Geographic position Latitude Longtitude GLL The modem will use whichever is provided It uses the GPS information to calculate the minimum and maximum delays to satellite and updates these if they need to change from their existing values Table 6 74 Round trip Delay 6 2 7 3 Satellite Longitude Range 180 Degrees to 180 Degrees step size 0 01 Degrees Description The longitudinal position of the satellite If using the modem front panel then the Up and Down arrow keys are used for setting and respectively Table 6 75 Satellite Longitude 6 2 7 4 Earth Station Longitude Range 180 Degrees to 180 Degrees step size 0 01 Degrees Description The longitudinal position corresponding to the modem location If using the modem front panel then the Up and Down arrow keys are used for setting and respectively Table 6 76 Earth Station Longitude 6 2 7 5 Earth Station Latitude Range 90 Degrees to 90 Degrees step size 0 01 Degrees Description The latitudinal position corresponding to the modem location If using the modem front panel then the Up and Down arrow keys are used for setting and respectively Table 6 77 Earth Station Latitude 6 72 Q Flex Satellite Modem Ins
272. threshold used to monitor for any signal under the received carrier If the detected level of interference exceeds the threshold then an Rx traffic warning alarm is raised See Section 7 6 for more information on LinkGuard M Table 6 41 LinkGuard Interferer Threshold 6 2 10 2 Tx Rx AIS Alarm Action These control the action taken with respect to Alarm Indication Signal AIS detection commonly used in G 703 circuits It is a sequence of all ones that replaces the normal data stream when a failure is detected in order to alert downstream equipment of the failure 6 38 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook AIS can be ignored or set to raise an alarm regenerate AIS and send a backward alarm where possible as described in Table 6 42 Ignore Ignore any AIS indication Prompt When AIS is detected raise an alarm regenerate the AIS indication and send a backward alarm to the upstream equipment Table 6 42 Tx Rx AIS Alarm Action 6 2 10 3 Local Remote Eb No Alarm Threshold Range OdB to 99 0dB step size 0 1dB Description These set the Eb No thresholds below which a deferred alarm will be generated for the local i e received carrier and remote i e transmitted carrier Eb No values respectively Table 6 43 Local Remote Eb No Alarm Threshold 6 2 10 4 Buffer Slip Alarm Threshold Range O hours to 9999 hours step size 1 hour Description S
273. tivity when passed over a Thin Route satellite circuit TB Frame Backward alarm TC AIS forced in the G 732 CAS abcd signalling nibble TD Force a fixed value in the G 732 CAS abcd signalling nibble TE Multiframe Backward alarm in IBS SMS TS16 TS48 over satellite Actions To Satellite SA AIS framed and scrambled and subject to RS coding if active SB Frame Backward alarm SC AIS in CAS signalling carried in IBS SMS TS16 TS48 over satellite Actions Other CM Carrier mute TF Tx flow control CTS Clear To Send line is switched off RF Rx flow control RR Receive Ready line is switched off Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 11 1 Transmit Faults FaultText Ir Notes Relays To Ter To Sat Other Tx fault External Tx clock The modem is set to use an external clock but no clock is selected but no clock being provided The clock generation will use the internal from interface clock as a backup to maintain the carrier and signal integrity Check the data connector is attached and check for activity on the clock input lines Tx fault Data Ready Input The DRI line has been de asserted by the data source active feeding the modem indicating a unit fault with data source Tx fault Signal Valid Input The SVI line has been de asserted by the data source active feeding the modem indicating it wished to disable transmission If the carrier is set to RTS Enabled the ca
274. tocol Phase Locked Loop Point to Point Protocol Pseudo Random Bit Sequence Phase Shift Keying Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Radio Frequency Reed Solomon Receive or Receiver Software Activated Feature Simple Network Management System Trellis Coded Modulation Turbo Product Coding Transmit or Transmitter 14 1 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter 15 Technical Support Technical Support can help with e Queries regarding equipment operation e The return of equipment for upgrade or repair e Customer training e Application notes and white papers Contact details in Europe and North America are as follows Teledyne Paradise Datacom Ltd Teledyne Paradise Datacom LLC 2 amp 3 The Matchyns Rivenhall End 328 Innovation Blvd Witham Essex CM8 3HA England State College PA 16803 U S A Tel 44 0 1376 515636 Tel 1 814 238 3450 Fax 44 0 1376 533764 Fax 1 814 238 3829 Worldwide support via email is available by filling in the Technical Support Contact Form on the Support web page at http www paradisedata com which will forward your support issues to your local Teledyne Paradise Datacom Technical Support team for your geographic area Repair Return Procedure Please refer to the equipment warranty statement for full details of returning equipment for repair or upgrade In summary 1 Ensure the equipment really does have a fault 2 Write an explicit fault report including wha
275. tral inversion in the modem to correct for it 7 40 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Chapter8 Remote Control Protocol The modem supports the following remote control interfaces e A built in remote web user interface that provides web pages from the modem using a web server to a web browser This is accessed by entering the IP address of the modem into a web browser address bar the web server being on port 80 e A serial interface selectable between RS232 and RS485 that can be used to send and receive Paradise Universal Protocol PUP messages This interface can be driven either through a generic user entry application such as HyperTerminal in the case of RS232 or through an application that uses a driver developed specifically to implement the PUP protocol In the case of RS485 a message wrapper defined in the document Remote M amp C Specification for Q Flex Satellite Modem is used to encapsulate PUP commands and responses which are incorporated into the message payload e An Ethernet interface that can be used to send and receive PUP messages or Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP messages This interface can be used in several ways Firstly a generic user entry application such as Telnet can be used to automatically send or manually enter PUP commands Secondly PUP messages can be encapsulated directly into TCP packets using the message format defined in the document Remote M amp
276. ts on port 80 using this screen 6 37 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 6 2 10 Edit gt Unit gt Alarms Screen The Edit gt Unit gt Alarms screen is shown in Figure 6 15 Unit Tx Predistorter CEA alarms Station Clock Miscellaneous LinkGuard interference LinkGuard interferer ha r dB over threshold check threshold 1 Tx AIS alarm action Ignore Rx AIS alarm action Ignore Local Eb No alarm threshold 3 0 T dB Remote Eb No alarm 0 0 odp threshold Buffer slip alarm threshold mn l i hrs BUC DC alarm enable Ignore v LNB DC alarm enable Ignore v BUC DC current minimum 0 10 A LNB DC current minimum lo m BUC DC current maximum 0 10 E i 4 LNB DC current maximum 500 m Figure 6 15 Edit gt Unit gt Alarms Screen 6 2 10 1 LinkGuard Interference LinkGuard is a Paradise patented technology US patent 8351495 for detecting in band interference underneath satellite carriers while remaining on traffic An automated alarm can be generated whenever the power spectral density of the interference goes above a user set threshold thereby automatically alerting the operator whenever meangingful levels of interference are detected This threshold check is enabled and disabled via the LinkGuard interference over threshold check control The threshold level setting itself is described in Table 6 41 Range OdB to 9 9dB step size 0 1dB Description Sets a power spectral density
277. turning remote signals traveling in the direction of the terrestrial interface back towards the satellite interface RF Test Modes This provides two types of signal a CW pure carrier signal and an alternate 1 0 signal that can be used to test modem operation IP Packet Satellite Delay This allows a one way satellite delay in milliseconds to be entered This can be used in modem back to back testing to simulate the normal satellite delay It applies to IP traffic only It should always be set to 0 when using IP over satellite Note that the use of this feature is currently incompatible with the use of IP traffic shaping as the two features compete for the same internal resources BER test This feature provides the ability to inject a test pattern into the modem through the main traffic channel or via an overhead channel and to monitor the results using the modem s internal Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRBS Bit Error Rate BER Tester 6 90 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Test H3 Loopback Loopback RF Test Modes Modulator cw TI Modulator alternate 1 0 IP Packet Satellite Delay Simulated satellite delay 0 ms Figure 6 49 Test Screen The Loopback setting allows a number of loopbacks to be selected to aid fault diagnosis and resolution of system level problems e IF local is used to loopback transmit to receive internally within the modem e Interface local and remote is used to loopba
278. uency reference The 10MHz reference can also be output through the 500 BNC station clock connector e A Frequency Shift Keying FSK capability for performing FSK communications to and from a compatible BUC or IF transceiver This allows remote monitoring and control of the BUC or transceiver via a modulated FSK signal on the Inter Facility Link IFL cable 5 2 2 Ethernet Operation Two Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 connectors are fitted as standard One of these is used for modem Monitor and Control M amp C and the other is for satellite traffic These provide a combined 150 000 packets per second processing capability Layer 2 bridging and Layer 3 routing are supported in software Trunking mode is our name for a hardware Layer 2 bridge that supports 160Mbps bi directional traffic at up to 500 000 packets per second with zero jitter Trunking mode supports ACM and AUPC but for all other XStream IP features such as compression a non trunking mode must be selected 5 2 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook A 4 port Gigabit Ethernet switch option is available This extends the base modem Ethernet traffic port with another 3 Ethernet ports creating a 4 port switch Ethernet speed duplex and cable termination crossover versus straight through are auto negotiated Speed and duplex can be set to fixed values if desired 5 3 Hardware Options 5 3 1 Terrestrial Interface Option Cards One interface position is av
279. ulator From modern baseband ee DEEN Tx data processing digital transmit signal Paired Carrier Cancellation Circuitry Cancelled signal Received signal containing only the containing near and far signal component Pa far signal components S Digital Analogue Demodulator Demodulator To modem baseband Rx data processing Figure 7 16 Q Flex Modem Paired Carrier Processing Paired Carrier can be added to existing systems as well as being incorporated into the design of new systems The signal cancellation techniques used guarantees at least 25dB typically 30dB cancellation of the unwanted signal meaning that the uplink and downlink signals can share the same space segment By doubling satellite throughput in terms of spectral efficiency Paired Carrier can be used to cut operational expenses and or free up satellite bandwidth for new applications and services The savings can be used to reduce bandwidth or increase throughput or convert to a higher coding gain to decrease power Both symmetric and asymmetric point to point links are supported Symmetric links typically have similar antenna sizes and use similar power levels at each end of the link whereas asymmetric links wil typically use a larger antenna at one end of the link anda smaller antenna at the other end with dissimilar power levels In the asymmetric case the system can be designed to require signal cancellation at only one end of the link with the unwa
280. up of the carrier overlap feature Memories These menus support the storing recall deletion upload and download of modem configurations e Redundancy These menus are used to control modem 1 1 and 1 N redundancy 6 2 4 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service Screen The Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service screen is shown in Figure 6 5 Paired Carrier Redundancy Tx Rx Memories Service AUPC BUC Advanced Service Terrestrial interface Rx values track Tx Tx service Rx service Tx rate control Symbol rate Y Rx rate control Data rate Tx data rate 0 128000 Mbps Rx data rate 0 128000 Mbps Tx symbol rate 0 100125 Msps Rx symbol rate 0 100125 Msps Tx clock source Rx clock source Modulation and Coding Tx FEC type Rx FEC type TPC Tx modulation Rx modulation Tx FEC code rate Rx FEC code rate Carrier Tx frequency band Rx frequency band Tx carrier frequency 950 0000 MHz Rx carrier frequency 950 0000 MHz BUC carrier frequency 0 9500000 GHz LNB carrier frequency 0 0000000 GHz Tx spectral roll off Rx spectral roll off f Tx spectral inversion Rx spectral inversion L band output power 30 0 dBm Modem carrier BUC carrier Figure 6 5 Edit gt Tx Rx gt Service Screen Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook When a value is changed in an edit or dropdown box the background for the box will change to red while the modem is actioning the change as shown in the example below Example of Modem Actioning
281. within a 64kbps IBS carrier and 2 x 32kbps audio ADPCM coded channels plus 64kbps data within a 128kbps IBS carrier Inner Forward Error Correction DVB S2 LDPC BCH EN 302 307 QPSK 1 4 1 3 2 5 1 2 3 5 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 8PSK 3 5 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 9 9 10 16APSK 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 Non DVB S2 FastLink Low Latency LDPC option BPSK 0 499 O QPSK 0 532 0 639 0 710 0 798 8PSK 8QAM 0 639 0 710 0 778 16APSK 16QAM 0 726 0 778 0 828 0 851 32APSK 0 778 0 828 0 886 0 938 64QAM 0 828 0 886 0 938 0 960 TPC option BPSK 5 16 21 44 2 3 3 4 Rate 7 8 de facto O QPSK 5 16 21 44 2 3 3 4 7 8 de facto 0 93 Paradise 8PSK 3 4 de facto 7 8 de facto 0 93 Paradise 16QAM 3 4 de facto 7 8 de facto 0 93 Paradise Viterbi BPSK O QPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 TCM 8PSK 2 3 Sequential BPSK O QPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 Outer Forward Error Correction Concatenated Intelsat Reed Solomon outer codec to IESS308 310 to 10 Mbps available with Viterbi TCM and Sequential For DVB S Reed Solomon outer codec 204 188 T 8 with interleaver depth of 12 Scrambling IBS Synchronised to framing per IESS 309 up to 10 Mbps Scrambling IDR Closed Network With RS coding synchronised to RS overhead Without RS coding and non TPC FEC V 35 self synchronising No RS coding with TPC FEC 2 1 up to 10 Mbps Scrambling Closed Network Plus ESC 32kbps or above synchronised t
282. x Data Interface Rx Buffer DDS Data from decoder deframer VERY PLL A Rx Clk Figure 7 4 Satellite Rx Clock Mode 7 1 2 2 Tx Clock In When Tx Clock In is selected the Rx clock and data are phase locked to the Tx data rate frequency but at the Rx data rate The clock and data appear on Receive Timing RT and Receive Data RD respectively The Rx Doppler buffer is enabled and the output clock for the buffer is derived from either ST or TT 7 4 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook RxData RxClock RT d A Rx Buffer DDS A Modem Rx Data Interface Data from decoder deframer YCXO A PLL Tx Clock TT y Tx Data I F Tx FIFO Figure 7 5 Tx Clock In Rx Clock Mode 7 1 2 3 Station Clock When Station is selected the modem s Rx timing is phase locked to the station clock input but is run at the Rx data rate frequency The Rx Doppler buffer is enabled The clock and data appear on RT Receive Timing and RD Receive Data respectively The station clock input can be configured to provide a clock just for Rx path processing or it can be used to replace the modem s internal 10MHz clock used for all internal processing The station clock frequency need not equal the modem s internal 10MHz clock frequency when it is being used to provide just Rx path clocking it can be set anywhere between 1kHz and 10MHz RxData
283. x Rx Terrestrial Interface Off When the terrestrial interface is off then then the particular stream is not used ASI 1 ASI 2 This takes the stream input from or directs the stream output to the ASI 3 specified port on the ASI card IP This takes the stream input from or directs the stream output to the IP traffic interface Table 6 68 Stream Tx Rx Terrestrial Interface 6 2 3 12 Stream Tx Rx Identifier Range O to 25 step size 1 Description In the context of DVB S2 Variable Coding and Modulation VCM used to support multiple streams the stream identifier corresponds to the DVB S2 Input Stream Identifier ISI used to differentiate each unique stream in order to be able to correlate transmitted and received streams Table 6 69 Stream Tx Rx Identifier 6 2 3 13 Stream Tx Data Rate Range 0 2Mbps to 160 0Mbps step size 0 000001 Mbps Description The stream data rate is the maximum number of data bits that the modem will process in relation to the selected terrestrial interface Table 6 70 Stream Tx Data Rate 6 2 3 14 Stream Tx Modulation Each stream can use any of the supported DVB S2 modulations as listed in Table 6 71 In receive the modulation type is detected automatically 6 64 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook QPSK 1 4 1 3 2 5 1 2 3 5 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9 10 DVB S2 8PSK 3 5 2 3 3
284. y ParadiseD atacom Publisher authenticity can not be verified A The security certificate was issued by a company that is not trusted G The security certificate has not expired and is still valid More Details Figure 6 36 Java Applet Security Warning Screen 6 2 10 1 Rx Spectrum Monitor The Rx Spectrum Monitor shown in Figure 6 37 is a powerful real time spectrum analyser within the modem that is used to view the received signal spectrum Graphs BESSE SA Spectrum Constellation Others Auto scale v Ref level dBm Span Normal v Resolution BW 49kHz Persistence _ Scale dB Average v Hi Definition v Spectral inversion Off Carrier frequency 70MHz Carrier level 18 4dBm Symbol rate 39999954sps Modulation 16APSK Code rate 0 851 Es No gt 20dB Eb No 16 8dB BER lt 1 0E 12 Amplitude dBm 20 000 000 1 0 000 000 0 10 000 000 20 000 000 70 0000MHz 04 March 2013 Figure 6 37 Rx Spectrum Monitor The Rx Spectrum Monitor can be used to check for correct modem operation 6 81 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook The Span can be set to Normal which limits the frequency span to that of the carrier or Super Wide which displays a frequency span of 25MHz centred on the carrier s centre frequency Super Wide is useful for checking for adjacent interfering carriers Hi Definition mode increases the number of samples by a factor of 4 but r
285. y looped to the modem s ESC interface then the commands can be forwarded to the far end of the link in order to control either the remote modem or other equipment IP Local This option is only available when the ESC interface type is set to P This mode takes the serial M amp C data converts it to an IP format and forwards it to the remote modem via the ESC channel where it is converted back to serial data again and output via the remote modem s M amp C serial interface This can be used to control remote equipment By converting the serial data to IP it allows the ESC channel to be shared with other IP traffic IP Remote This mode is used at the remote end of the link It allows serial M amp C data transferred in IP format over the ESC channel to be output via the serial M amp C interface of the remote modem See Figure 6 10 for details of the TCP port usage in relation to these commands This allows serial control of remote equipment while allowing the ESC channel to operate in an IP mode where it is shared with other IP traffic 6 31 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook IP Forward to Remote This option is only available when the ESC interface type is set to IP Commands sent to the local modem s IP address are forwarded to the remote modem where the commands are converted to serial M amp C commands for control of remote equipment See Figure 6 10 for details
286. yne Paradise Datacom The code is tied to the modem serial number available via the user interfaces and on the back panel The features that have been temporarily enabled on a modem can be viewed along with the time remaining before they become disabled as can the features that have been permanently enabled and those that can potentially be enabled The SAF function keeps the initial cost of a modem to the minimum and allows simple field upgrading at a later date as required 7 5 Software Upgrading It is possible to update the software and firmware within the modem via the Remote M amp C Ethernet connection web user interface upgrades via the serial M amp C port are not supported The software upgrade process is described in Section 6 2 13 7 13 Q Flex Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook 7 6 LinkGuard Interference Detection and Carrier Relocation LinkGuard is a Paradise patented technology for detecting in band interference underneath satellite carriers while remaining on traffic A visual indication of any unwanted interference is provided through a signal under carrier spectrum web graph showing the wanted carrier along with any unwanted interference The graph includes a persistence mode to show even intermittent interference In addition LinkGuard now supports the ability to optionally automatically relocate a carrier to a new user selected frequency when significant levels of interference

Q-Flex™ Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Q-Flex&trade; Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Q-Flex™ Satellite Modem Installation and Operating Handbook